1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the manual prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the manual may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % the pages of the TOC are numbered roman
19 % and a PDF-bookmark for the TOC is added
21 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
22 \renewcommand{\tableofcontents}{%
23 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
26 \pagenumbering{arabic}}
28 % extra space for tables
29 \newcommand{\extratablespace}[1]{\noalign{\vskip#1}}
31 \options bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
32 \use_default_options false
44 \maintain_unincluded_children no
46 \language_package default
49 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
50 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
51 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
52 \font_math "auto" "auto"
53 \font_default_family default
54 \use_non_tex_fonts false
58 \font_typewriter_osf false
59 \font_sf_scale 100 100
60 \font_tt_scale 100 100
62 \use_dash_ligatures true
64 \default_output_format pdf2
66 \bibtex_command default
67 \index_command default
68 \float_placement class
69 \float_alignment class
73 \pdf_title "LyX's Additional Features manual"
74 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
75 \pdf_subject "LyX's additional features documentation"
76 \pdf_keywords "LyX, Documentation, Additional"
78 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
79 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
80 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
85 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
86 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
89 \use_package amsmath 1
90 \use_package amssymb 1
93 \use_package mathdots 1
94 \use_package mathtools 1
96 \use_package stackrel 1
97 \use_package stmaryrd 1
98 \use_package undertilde 1
100 \cite_engine_type default
104 \paperorientation portrait
110 \notefontcolor #0000ff
117 \paragraph_separation indent
118 \paragraph_indentation default
120 \math_indentation default
121 \math_numbering_side default
122 \quotes_style english
126 \paperpagestyle headings
128 \tracking_changes true
129 \output_changes false
131 \postpone_fragile_content false
135 \docbook_table_output 0
136 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
137 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
140 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
141 \author 274215730 "scott"
142 \author 564990737 "John Lyx"
143 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
144 \author 1075283030 "Thibaut"
145 \author 1119979965 "Joel A. Kulesza"
151 Additional \SpecialChar LyX
155 \begin_layout Subtitle
157 \change_deleted 630872221 1622909155
159 \change_inserted 630872221 1622909155
166 by the \SpecialChar LyX
171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
173 Principal maintainer of this file is
175 Richard Kimberly Heck
178 If you have comments or error corrections,
179 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
180 Documentation mailing list,
182 \begin_inset Flex Code
185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 <lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org>
199 \begin_layout Standard
200 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
201 LatexCommand tableofcontents
208 \begin_layout Standard
210 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865652
211 \begin_inset Note Note
214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
216 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865674
217 Note to all translators:
220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
222 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865817
223 This manual was restructured for LyX 2.4.
224 Attached are notes for translators to help them to find their way round the new structure of Additional.lyx.
225 This note itself will be deleted in the final 2.4 release.
226 \begin_inset Newline newline
232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
234 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
237 Additional.lyx 2.4 Changes
240 \begin_layout Itemize
242 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
247 \begin_layout Itemize
249 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
254 \begin_layout Itemize
256 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
263 \begin_layout Itemize
265 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
267 moved and minor edits
270 \begin_layout Itemize
272 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
277 \begin_layout Itemize
279 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
284 \begin_layout Itemize
286 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
291 \begin_layout Itemize
293 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
295 moved and significant edits
298 \begin_layout Itemize
300 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
305 \begin_layout Itemize
307 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
312 \begin_layout Itemize
314 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
316 moved and minor edits
319 \begin_layout Itemize
321 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
326 \begin_layout Itemize
328 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
333 \begin_layout Itemize
335 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
340 \begin_layout Itemize
342 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
347 \begin_layout Itemize
349 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865824
354 \begin_layout Itemize
356 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
361 \begin_layout Itemize
363 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
368 \begin_layout Itemize
370 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
375 \begin_layout Itemize
377 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
382 \begin_layout Itemize
384 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
389 \begin_layout Itemize
391 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
396 \begin_layout Itemize
398 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
400 moved with minor edits
403 \begin_layout Itemize
405 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
410 \begin_layout Itemize
412 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
417 \begin_layout Itemize
419 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
421 moved with minor edits
424 \begin_layout Itemize
426 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
431 \begin_layout Itemize
433 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
438 \begin_layout Itemize
440 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
445 \begin_layout Itemize
447 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
448 (Note that document classes which appeared in 2.3 but do not appear in 2.4 were either removed previously or have been removed during this revision because they are no longer available anywhere.)
452 \begin_layout Itemize
454 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
461 \begin_layout Itemize
463 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
464 All module descriptions new except:
467 \begin_layout Itemize
469 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
471 moved with minor edits
474 \begin_layout Itemize
476 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
477 Custom header/footer text:
478 moved with minor edits
481 \begin_layout Itemize
483 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
485 moved with minor edits
488 \begin_layout Itemize
490 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
491 Custom paragraph shapes:
492 moved with minor edits
495 \begin_layout Itemize
497 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
499 moved with minor edits
503 \begin_layout Itemize
505 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
512 \begin_layout Itemize
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
515 Content moved but unchanged
519 \begin_layout Itemize
521 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
528 \begin_layout Itemize
530 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
531 Content moved but unchanged
535 \begin_layout Itemize
537 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
540 new chapter and content
543 \begin_layout Itemize
545 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
546 All other chapters unchanged but renumbered except:
549 \begin_layout Itemize
551 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
552 section 11.3 Literate programming:
563 \begin_layout Chapter
567 \begin_layout Standard
568 This manual is essentially Part II of the
570 User's Guide\SpecialChar endofsentence
573 The reason for separating the two documents is simple:
578 is already quite lengthy,
579 and it contains information on all of the basic features one needs to know in order to prepare most documents.
582 Team has worked to make \SpecialChar LyX
583 extensible through various configuration files and external packages.
584 That means that if you want to support the Fizzwizzle \SpecialChar LaTeX
586 you can create a layout file (or module) for it without having to alter \SpecialChar LyX
588 We've already had contributions of several new features this way,
589 and some of them are documented here.
590 There are also some more `advanced' features,
591 such as how to control the presentation of bibliographies and how to work with multi-part documents,
592 that are not covered in the
596 and are discussed here.
599 \begin_layout Standard
600 This manual also documents some special features,
602 \change_deleted 244031559 1603802929
605 \change_inserted 244031559 1603802931
609 \change_deleted 244031559 1603802954
614 which require additional software to work properly.
615 There is also a chapter on \SpecialChar LyX
618 there's a chapter of \SpecialChar LaTeX
620 things you can use to spruce up your documents by directly using the powerful features of \SpecialChar LaTeX
628 only WYSIWYM and will only ever interface to some,
634 \begin_layout Standard
635 If you haven't read the
640 you are definitely in the wrong manual.
645 is the first place to go,
646 since it describes the notation and format of all of the manuals.
647 You should also be thoroughly familiar with the
651 and all of the basic features of \SpecialChar LyX
652 before attempting to read this one.
655 \begin_layout Standard
656 Since many of the topics in this manual depend heavily on \SpecialChar LyX
657 's interaction with \SpecialChar LaTeX
659 this first chapter covers the inner workings of \SpecialChar LyX
660 and how to direct \SpecialChar LyX
661 to generate exactly the \SpecialChar LaTeX
663 It is obviously for more seasoned \SpecialChar LyX
667 \begin_layout Chapter
669 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
673 \begin_layout Section
675 Uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
679 \begin_layout Standard
680 This chapter is for both \SpecialChar TeX
681 -nicians and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
684 we'll explain how \SpecialChar LyX
685 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
686 work together to produce printable output.
687 This is the only place in any of the manuals where we assume you know something about \SpecialChar LaTeX
691 \begin_layout Standard
695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
698 WYSIWYM frontend to \SpecialChar LaTeX
700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
703 but that's no longer true.
704 There are frontends to \SpecialChar LaTeX
709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
710 Some familar ones are \SpecialChar TeX
716 There are also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
717 modes for vi and emacs,
723 These are basically text editors with the ability to run \SpecialChar LaTeX
724 and mark any errors in the file you're editing.
725 Although \SpecialChar LyX
735 run \SpecialChar LaTeX
737 and it also indicates errors in the file,
741 you don't need to know \SpecialChar LaTeX
742 to use \SpecialChar LyX
745 has added its own extensions to \SpecialChar LaTeX
747 Try the following sometime:
749 \begin_inset Flex Noun
752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
760 \begin_inset Flex Noun
763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
770 \begin_inset Flex Noun
773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
774 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
785 then look at the preamble of the resulting
786 \begin_inset Flex Code
789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
796 You'll notice a variety of new macros defined specifically by \SpecialChar LyX
798 These macros are defined automatically,
799 according to the features you use in the document.
802 \begin_layout Standard
803 There are several commands that automatically invoke \SpecialChar LaTeX
808 \begin_layout Itemize
809 \begin_inset Flex Noun
812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
822 \begin_layout Itemize
823 \begin_inset Flex Noun
826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
836 \begin_layout Standard
837 They will only invoke \SpecialChar LaTeX
838 if the file has changed since the last time \SpecialChar LaTeX
843 \begin_layout Standard
844 When \SpecialChar LyX
845 runs \SpecialChar LaTeX
846 on the file you're editing,
847 it performs these steps:
850 \begin_layout Enumerate
851 Convert the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
852 and save to a file with the extension
853 \begin_inset Flex Code
856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
863 \begin_inset Flex Code
866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
875 \begin_layout Enumerate
876 Run \SpecialChar LaTeX
878 \begin_inset Flex Code
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
887 file (maybe several times),
888 and run any other commands (such as
889 \begin_inset Flex Code
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 \begin_inset Flex Code
902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
908 ) needed to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
912 \begin_layout Enumerate
913 If there are any errors,
917 \begin_layout Standard
918 If you have run \SpecialChar LaTeX
920 \begin_inset Flex Noun
923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
924 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
932 then runs a DVI viewer to display the DVI-file.
934 \begin_inset Flex Noun
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
938 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
946 performs further steps:
949 \begin_layout Enumerate
951 \begin_inset Flex Code
954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 to convert the DVI file to PostScript.
963 \begin_layout Enumerate
964 Run a PostScript viewer,
966 \begin_inset Flex Code
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
976 to display the PostScript file.
979 \begin_layout Standard
981 does similar things when viewing,
986 \begin_layout Section
987 Translating \SpecialChar LaTeX
988 files into \SpecialChar LyX
992 \begin_layout Standard
993 You can import a \SpecialChar LaTeX
994 file into \SpecialChar LyX
996 \begin_inset Flex Noun
999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
1001 Import\SpecialChar menuseparator
1007 command in \SpecialChar LyX
1009 This will call a program named
1010 \begin_inset Flex Code
1013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1019 which will create a file
1020 \begin_inset Flex Code
1023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1030 \begin_inset Flex Code
1033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 will then open that file.
1045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Flex Code
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1055 can also be run from the command line,
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 \begin_inset Flex Code
1068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1074 will translate most legal \SpecialChar LaTeX
1077 It will put things it doesn't understand into \SpecialChar TeX
1079 so after translating a file with
1080 \begin_inset Flex Code
1083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1090 you can look for \SpecialChar TeX
1091 code and hand-edit it until it looks right.
1094 \begin_layout Standard
1095 If you don't know what \SpecialChar TeX
1097 read the next section.
1100 \begin_layout Section
1101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1103 name "sec:Inserting-TeX-Code"
1107 Inserting \SpecialChar TeX
1108 Code into \SpecialChar LyX
1112 \begin_layout Standard
1113 Anything you can do in \SpecialChar LaTeX
1114 you can do in \SpecialChar LyX
1116 for a very simple reason:
1117 You can always insert \SpecialChar TeX
1118 code into any \SpecialChar LyX
1122 and will never be able to,
1123 display every possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
1125 If ever you need to insert \SpecialChar LaTeX
1126 commands into your \SpecialChar LyX
1129 \begin_inset Flex Code
1132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1140 which you can insert into your document with
1141 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
1155 or the keyboard shortcut
1164 \begin_layout Standard
1165 Here's an example of inserting \SpecialChar LaTeX
1166 commands in a \SpecialChar LyX
1168 The code looks like this:
1171 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1175 \begin_inset Newline newline
1180 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1181 \begin_inset Newline newline
1184 This is an example of a minipage environment.
1186 \begin_inset Newline newline
1189 can put nearly everything in it,
1191 \begin_inset Newline newline
1196 \begin_inset Newline newline
1202 \begin_inset Newline newline
1206 \begin_inset Newline newline
1211 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1212 \begin_inset Newline newline
1218 \begin_inset Newline newline
1223 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1224 \begin_inset Newline newline
1229 \begin_inset Newline newline
1235 \begin_inset Newline newline
1241 \begin_inset Newline newline
1247 \begin_inset Newline newline
1255 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1259 \begin_layout Standard
1261 \begin_inset Flex Code
1264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 box containing this text is directly after this paragraph.
1272 Those of you reading the manual in \SpecialChar LyX
1273 will only see the \SpecialChar TeX
1275 Those reading a printed version of the manuals will see the actual results:
1276 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
1282 \begin_layout Standard
1286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1297 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1302 This is an example of a minipage environment.
1303 You can put nearly everything in it,
1304 even (non-floating) figures and tables.
1308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1324 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1338 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1378 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
1384 \begin_layout Standard
1385 In addition to using \SpecialChar TeX
1387 you can also create a separate file containing some complex \SpecialChar LaTeX
1388 structure and then use
1389 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
1395 \begin_inset space ~
1403 to include your file (you should select the type
1404 \begin_inset Flex Code
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1414 We recommend that you only do this if you have a
1415 \begin_inset Flex Code
1418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1430 you'll have a big job tracking down \SpecialChar LaTeX
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1435 There are a few last points to emphasize:
1438 \begin_layout Itemize
1444 check if your \SpecialChar LaTeX
1448 \begin_layout Itemize
1449 Beware of reinventing the wheel.
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1455 does have quite a few features tucked into it,
1456 and more are coming.
1457 Be sure to check the manuals to make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
1458 doesn't have such-and-such feature before you decide you have to do it by hand.
1460 there are numerous \SpecialChar LaTeX
1461 packages out there to do all sorts of things,
1462 from labels to envelopes to fancy multipage tables.
1464 \change_inserted 244031559 1603815732
1466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
1469 target "https://www.ctan.org/"
1475 \change_deleted 244031559 1603815732
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset href
1480 target "http://www.ctan.org/"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you do need to do some wild and fancy things within your document,
1492 be sure to check out a good \SpecialChar LaTeX
1493 book for assistance.
1494 There are a number of them listed in the bibliography of the
1501 \begin_layout Section
1503 and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
1507 \begin_layout Subsection
1508 About the \SpecialChar LaTeX
1512 \begin_layout Standard
1513 If you already know \SpecialChar LaTeX
1515 there is no need to explain here what the preamble is good for.
1517 the following will give you some ideas—
1518 we recommend again that you consult a \SpecialChar LaTeX
1519 book for further information.
1521 you should read the points below,
1522 because they explain what you can do and what you don't need to do in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
1523 preamble of a \SpecialChar LyX
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
1529 preamble comes at the very beginning of a document,
1538 \begin_layout Itemize
1539 Declare the document class.
1541 \begin_inset Newline newline
1545 already does this for you.
1546 If you're a seasoned \SpecialChar LaTeX
1548 and you have a custom document class you want to use,
1551 Customization Manual
1553 for information on how to make \SpecialChar LyX
1557 \begin_layout Itemize
1558 Declare the usage of packages.
1560 \begin_inset Newline newline
1564 packages provide special commands,
1565 which are only available within a document when the package has been declared in the preamble.
1566 In addition to providing special commands,
1567 the inclusion of a package can change the document.
1570 \begin_inset Flex Code
1573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1579 forces all paragraphs to be indented.
1580 There are other packages for labels,
1587 \begin_layout Itemize
1592 \begin_inset Newline newline
1595 There are several \SpecialChar LaTeX
1596 counters and variables that
1600 be set globally from within the preamble in order to have the desired effect.
1601 (There are variables that you can set and reset inside the document,
1602 too.) Margins are a good example of something that must be set in the preamble.
1603 Another example is the label format for lists.
1604 You can actually set these just about anywhere,
1605 but it's best to do it just once,
1606 inside the preamble.
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Declare user defined commands (with
1611 \begin_inset Flex Code
1614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1623 \begin_inset Flex Code
1626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1635 \begin_inset Newline newline
1638 These are abbreviations for \SpecialChar LaTeX
1639 commands which appear very often inside a document.
1640 Although the preamble is a good place to declare such commands,
1645 be declared anywhere (before they are used for the first time,
1647 This can be useful if there is a lot of raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
1648 code in your document,
1649 which normally should not be the case.
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 adds its own set of definitions to the preamble of the
1655 \begin_inset Flex Code
1658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1665 This makes \SpecialChar LaTeX
1666 files generated by \SpecialChar LyX
1670 \begin_layout Subsection
1671 Changing the Preamble
1674 \begin_layout Standard
1675 The commands which \SpecialChar LyX
1676 adds to the preamble of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
1678 you can't change them without patching \SpecialChar LyX
1682 add your own stuff to the preamble by selecting
1683 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1689 \begin_inset space ~
1698 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 adds anything in the
1711 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1720 dialog to its own built-in preamble.
1721 Before adding your own declarations in the preamble,
1722 you should make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
1723 doesn't already support what you want to do.
1724 (Remember what we said about reinventing the wheel?) Also,
1727 make sure your preamble code is correct
1731 doesn't check it for you.
1732 If there is an error,
1733 you're likely to get an error like
1734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1738 \begin_inset Flex Code
1741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1754 If you see this error,
1755 check your preamble.
1758 \begin_layout Subsection
1762 \begin_layout Standard
1763 Here are some examples of what you can add to a preamble,
1767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
1772 \begin_layout Standard
1773 There are two variables under \SpecialChar LaTeX
1774 that control page position:
1776 \begin_inset Flex Code
1779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1788 \begin_inset Flex Code
1791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1800 Their names should be self-explanatory.
1801 These variables are useful if you think for a moment about computer labels.
1803 the size of a print medium and the area of the medium that you can actually print on aren't the same.
1805 \begin_inset Flex Code
1808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1817 \begin_inset Flex Code
1820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 The default values for
1833 \begin_inset Flex Code
1836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1845 \begin_inset Flex Code
1848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1866 \begin_inset space \space{}
1869 the page isn't shifted.
1871 some DVI drivers always seem to shift the page.
1872 We have no idea why,
1873 or why the sysadmin hasn't fixed such behavior.
1874 If you're using \SpecialChar LyX
1875 on a system that you don't personally maintain,
1876 and your sysadmin is a doofus,
1878 \begin_inset Flex Code
1881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1890 \begin_inset Flex Code
1893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1902 Suppose your left and top margins are always 0.5
1903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1907 You can add this to the preamble:
1910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1918 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1926 \begin_layout Standard
1927 and your margins should now be correct.
1930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
1935 \begin_layout Standard
1937 suppose you wanted to print out a bunch of address labels.
1938 There's a rather nice package,
1939 available at your nearest CTAN archive,
1940 for printing sheets of labels:
1942 \begin_inset Flex Code
1945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 your system may not have this package installed by default.
1954 We leave that up to you to check.
1955 You'll also want to read the documentation for it;
1956 we're not going to do that for you.
1957 Since this is an example,
1959 we'll give you an example of how you use this package.
1962 \begin_layout Standard
1964 make sure you're using the
1965 \begin_inset Flex Code
1968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1976 you need to put the following in your preamble:
1979 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1985 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1991 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1997 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2003 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2009 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2021 \begin_layout Standard
2022 This sets things up for Avery label sheets,
2024 You're now ready to print labels,
2025 but you'll need to insert \SpecialChar LaTeX
2027 placing the commands
2028 \begin_inset Flex Code
2031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2040 \begin_inset Flex Code
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 around each label text.
2052 This and other special features of
2053 \begin_inset Flex Code
2056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 are explained in its documentation.
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2067 someone may write a \SpecialChar LyX
2068 layout file to support this package directly.
2069 Maybe that someone is you.
2072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2074 Paragraph Indentation
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 Americans are trained to indent the first line of
2083 As with all of their other weird quirks,
2084 most Americans will whine and moan until they can have their way and indent the first line of all paragraphs.
2095 \begin_layout Standard
2097 this behavior isn't standard typography.
2099 you typically only indent the first line of a paragraph
2103 it follows another one.
2104 The idea behind indenting the first line of a paragraph is to distinguish neighboring paragraphs from one another.
2105 If there is no previous paragraph—
2107 if it follows a figure or is the first paragraph in a section—
2108 then there is no need for indentation.
2112 \begin_layout Standard
2113 If you're a typical American (we're still joking!),
2115 you don't care about such esoteric things;
2116 you want your indentation!
2117 Add this to the preamble:
2120 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2123 usepackage{indentfirst}
2126 \begin_layout Standard
2127 If your \SpecialChar TeX
2128 distribution isn't braindead,
2129 you'll have this package,
2130 and all of your paragraphs will get the indentation the Founding Fathers intended they should have.
2133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2138 \begin_layout Standard
2139 You can also check out the preamble of this document to get an idea of some of the advanced things you can do.
2142 \begin_layout Section
2144 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
2148 \begin_layout Standard
2149 When \SpecialChar LyX
2150 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
2152 it tells \SpecialChar LaTeX
2153 to blithely ignore any errors and keep going.
2154 It then uses the logfile from the \SpecialChar LaTeX
2155 run to do a post-mortem.
2156 After analyzing the logfile,
2158 displays a dialog listing the errors.
2159 Clicking on any one of them will take you to the position in your \SpecialChar LyX
2160 file where the error occurred.
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 Analyzing the logfile is a tough job,
2168 and \SpecialChar LyX
2169 doesn't always go to the right line.
2170 There are also cases where \SpecialChar LaTeX
2171 reports the error on one line,
2172 but the actual error is earlier.
2173 This is not unlike forgetting a closing brace in a program:
2174 You'll get an error,
2183 \begin_layout Standard
2184 Some folks also like to look at the log file directly:
2185 It is available from
2186 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2192 \begin_inset space ~
2201 There are some fairly common error messages and warnings.
2202 We'll cover those here.
2203 You should look at a good \SpecialChar LaTeX
2204 book for a complete listing.
2207 \begin_layout Itemize
2208 \begin_inset Flex Code
2211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2218 \begin_inset Newline newline
2221 Anything beginning with these words is a warning message for the purpose of
2222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2229 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
2231 You'll get messages like this if you added or changed cross-references or bibliography entries,
2234 is trying to tell you that you need to make another run.
2235 You can by-and-large ignore these.
2238 \begin_layout Itemize
2239 \begin_inset Flex Code
2242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2249 \begin_inset Newline newline
2252 Another warning message,
2253 this time about fonts which \SpecialChar LaTeX
2255 The rest of the message will often say something about a replacement font that \SpecialChar LaTeX
2257 You can safely ignore these,
2261 \begin_layout Itemize
2262 \begin_inset Flex Code
2265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2274 \begin_inset Newline newline
2283 It seems to generate at least one of these messages for just about any document you write.
2284 They are warnings about lines that were too long and run past the right margin.
2285 This happens if \SpecialChar LaTeX
2286 does not find a reasonable way to break the lines (notoriously often with typewriter font,
2287 since this does not allow for automatic break points).
2289 this is unnoticeable in the final output.
2290 (It can be just a point or two.) Sometimes,
2292 the lines run rather visibly into the margin;
2293 something you will not want to have in your final print.
2295 \begin_inset Newline newline
2298 There are several global ways to try to minimize the overfull lines.
2301 Enable micro-typographic extensions
2305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2309 might already improve things a lot.
2312 code such as the following in
2314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2315 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2318 usually reduces the overfull lines drastically (we use this in the preamble of this document):
2322 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2326 \begin_inset Newline newline
2332 \begin_inset Newline newline
2337 emergencystretch 1.5em
2338 \begin_inset Newline newline
2346 \begin_layout Standard
2349 you eventually have to rewrite the text to get the line breaking right.
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 For more information,
2356 \begin_inset Flex URL
2359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-overfull.html
2374 \begin_layout Standard
2376 you should check the respective lines,
2377 at least for the final version of your document.
2378 Your eyes will tell you if there's a problem with something that's too wide.
2382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2383 You can also enable the `draft' option in
2384 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2395 and then \SpecialChar LaTeX
2396 will draw a black box in the margin of lines that are overfull.
2405 \begin_layout Itemize
2406 \begin_inset Flex Code
2409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_inset Newline newline
2421 Not quite as common as its cousin.
2422 This happens again if \SpecialChar LaTeX
2423 does not find a reasonable break point and consequently generates too loose lines.
2424 As with the overfull lines,
2425 you should check if this is a visible problem.
2428 \begin_layout Itemize
2429 \begin_inset Flex Code
2432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2441 \begin_inset Flex Code
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2453 \begin_inset Newline newline
2456 Warnings about troubles breaking the page.
2458 just look at the output.
2459 Your eyes will tell you where something has gone wrong.
2462 \begin_layout Itemize
2463 \begin_inset Flex Code
2466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2469 \begin_inset Quotes els
2473 \begin_inset Quotes ers
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2493 isn't installed on this system.
2494 This usually appears because some package your document needs isn't installed.
2495 If you didn't touch the preamble or didn't use the
2496 \begin_inset Flex Code
2499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2508 then one of the packages \SpecialChar LyX
2509 tried to load is missing.
2511 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2515 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
2522 to get a list of packages that \SpecialChar LyX
2524 This file is updated whenever you reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
2526 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2530 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2536 ) and tells you which packages have been detected and what they do.
2537 \begin_inset Newline newline
2541 \begin_inset Flex Code
2544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 command and the package in question isn't installed,
2553 then you'll need to install it yourself.
2556 \begin_layout Itemize
2557 \begin_inset Flex Code
2560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2568 \begin_inset Newline newline
2571 Error messages beginning with this are trying to tell you that you specified a bad or undefined option to a package.
2572 Check the package's documentation.
2575 \begin_layout Itemize
2576 \begin_inset Flex Code
2579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2580 Undefined control sequence
2586 \begin_inset Newline newline
2589 If you've inserted \SpecialChar LaTeX
2590 code into your document,
2592 you'll get one of these.
2593 You may have forgotten to load a package.
2595 this error message usually means that you used an undefined command.
2599 \begin_layout Standard
2600 There are other error and warning messages.
2601 Some are self-explanatory.
2602 These are usually \SpecialChar LaTeX
2604 Others are downright cryptic.
2605 These are usually \SpecialChar TeX
2611 what they mean or how to decipher them.
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 There's a general sequence you should follow if you get error messages:
2619 \begin_layout Enumerate
2620 Look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
2621 code you inserted for typos.
2624 \begin_layout Enumerate
2625 If there are no typos,
2626 check that you used the command(s) correctly.
2629 \begin_layout Enumerate
2630 If you get a bunch of error boxes piled up at the very top of the document—
2631 and especially if you see a
2632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Flex Code
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2652 it means that there are errors in the preamble.
2653 Start debugging your preamble.
2656 \begin_layout Enumerate
2657 If you didn't add anything to the preamble and didn't add any \SpecialChar LaTeX
2658 code to the document,
2659 the first suspect is your \SpecialChar LaTeX
2660 distribution itself.
2661 Check for missing packages and install them.
2664 \begin_layout Enumerate
2666 so there are no missing packages.
2667 Did you use any of the fine-tuning options in \SpecialChar LyX
2675 like trying to manually insert lots of
2676 \begin_inset Flex Code
2679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2681 \change_deleted 177693 1654669036
2683 \change_inserted 177693 1654669038
2687 \begin_inset space ~
2691 \change_deleted 177693 1654669040
2693 \change_inserted 177693 1654669041
2703 \begin_inset Flex Code
2706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2714 \begin_inset Flex Code
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Did you try to kludge something together with these instead of using the appropriate paragraph environment?
2727 \begin_layout Enumerate
2729 you didn't use any of the fine-tuning options,
2730 you played by the rules.
2731 Did you try to pull a fancy maneuver?
2732 Did you do something funky inside a table or an equation,
2733 like inserting a graphic into a table cell?
2736 \begin_layout Enumerate
2737 Do you have long sections of text where \SpecialChar LaTeX
2738 cannot find a place to break a line?
2741 is rather strict about how much extra inter-word spacing it will add in order to break a line.
2743 you should rework the paragraph to avoid the problem.
2746 \begin_layout Enumerate
2747 Did you go overboard with the nesting?
2749 (currently) doesn't check to make sure you're in the limits for nesting environments.
2750 If you nested a bunch of environments to the
2751 \begin_inset Formula $17^{\mathrm{th}}$
2756 (The limit in \SpecialChar LaTeX
2760 \begin_layout Enumerate
2762 you didn't get any error messages,
2763 but your output looks awful.
2764 If you have a table or figure that's too wide or long for the page,
2769 \begin_layout Enumerate
2770 rescale the figure so it fits.
2773 \begin_layout Enumerate
2774 trim down the table so it fits.
2778 \begin_layout Enumerate
2779 If something else is wrong with the output,
2780 and you didn't try to pull anything fancy or kludge the fine-tuning options,
2781 we're not sure what's wrong.
2784 \begin_layout Standard
2785 If all this doesn't help—
2791 you might have found a bug in \SpecialChar LyX
2796 \begin_layout Chapter
2798 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345271
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2804 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345272
2811 originally offered four standard document classes,
2815 but individuals and organizations,
2816 most notably the American Mathematical Society in the early days,
2817 have made many contributions to extending the range of document classes.
2818 In this chapter we summarize the main externally maintained classes,
2819 some of which are marked “Unavailable:” in the pull-down
2822 \begin_inset space ~
2836 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
2841 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2843 \begin_inset space ~
2848 dialog and which you will need to install as described in the
2850 Installing New Document Classes
2856 manual if you want to use them.
2860 \begin_layout Section
2862 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439533
2863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2865 name "sec:Collections"
2872 \begin_layout Subsection
2874 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2877 name "subsec:AMS-LaTeX-(American-Mathematical"
2881 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
2882 (American Mathematical Society)
2885 \begin_layout Standard
2887 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2888 The \SpecialChar LyX
2889 supported document classes
2897 are maintained by the Society;
2898 use of their features is described in the Math manual and on their website
2899 \begin_inset Flex URL
2902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2904 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2906 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
2914 The following summary was originally provided by
2921 \change_inserted -712698321 1673082716
2923 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2926 and the \SpecialChar LyX
2930 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345297
2933 AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2939 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345297
2947 Richard Kimberly Heck
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
2959 \begin_layout Standard
2961 The AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
2962 layouts are set up to conform to suggested styles for mathematical papers to be submitted to American Mathematical Society publications.
2963 The layouts are not tailored to a specific journal,
2965 You should refer to the AMS documentation for specific instructions for each journal (usually it will entail only changing a single line in the \SpecialChar TeX
2967 That documentation is available on the Web at
2968 \begin_inset Flex URL
2971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2979 \begin_inset Flex URL
2982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2984 ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/amslatex/
2990 These layouts are appropriate,
2992 for any mathematical writing.
2996 \begin_layout Standard
2998 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083001
3000 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083002
3003 basic AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
3008 \begin_layout Itemize
3010 The standard AMS article format
3011 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345333
3015 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
3016 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
3017 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
3018 American Mathematical Society (AMS)
3025 \begin_layout Itemize
3027 the standard AMS book (really,
3029 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345366
3033 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
3034 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
3035 Books\SpecialChar menuseparator
3036 American Mathematical Society (AMS)
3041 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345369
3045 \begin_layout Itemize
3047 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345383
3049 the standard AMS proceedings format.
3052 \begin_layout Standard
3054 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345383
3056 only supports the first two natively;
3059 Installing New Document Classes
3065 manual if you want to use
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 The layouts themselves contain only the minimum necessary to use the AMS classes.
3076 contain any of the `theorem' environments used for setting theorems,
3079 These are contained,
3082 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345416
3084 \begin_inset Flex Code
3087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345416
3102 which is loaded by default when you select one of the AMS classes.
3103 (It can also be used with other classes and can be removed,
3104 if you would rather use something else.) Less commonly used environments are in the
3105 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345436
3107 \begin_inset Flex Code
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3111 Theorems (AMS-Extended)
3117 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345436
3120 AMS Theorems (Extended)
3125 which must be loaded manually.
3128 \begin_layout Standard
3130 theorems and the like are numbered consecutively throughout the document,
3131 but this may be modified by loading the module
3132 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345461
3134 \begin_inset Flex Code
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3138 Theorems (Order by Section)
3144 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345461
3147 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Section)
3153 \begin_inset Flex Code
3156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3164 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345479
3166 \begin_inset Flex Code
3169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 Theorems (Order by Chapter)
3176 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345480
3179 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapter)
3184 These will number the results as
3185 \begin_inset Formula $n.m$
3189 where the first number refers to the section (or chapter) and the second refers to the total number of results so far in that section (or chapter).
3190 Many environments are also available unnumbered.
3191 These are indicated by an asterisk at the end.
3192 If you happen to want
3198 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345498
3200 \begin_inset Flex Code
3203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3210 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345498
3213 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
3217 provides that option.
3220 \begin_layout Standard
3221 Note that these modules do not
3225 to be used with the AMS classes.
3226 It is perfectly possible to use the
3227 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345520
3229 \begin_inset Flex Code
3232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3239 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345520
3247 and the others mentioned,
3250 \begin_inset Flex Code
3253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083855
3257 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083855
3258 Article (Standard Class)
3267 \begin_inset Flex Code
3270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083858
3274 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083862
3275 Report (Standard Class)
3284 \begin_inset Flex Code
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083819
3291 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083822
3303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3304 What these layouts provide
3307 \begin_layout Standard
3308 There is a long list of included environments provided by these layouts.
3309 In AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 an opportunity to define an unlimited variety of `theorem' environments.
3315 the AMS recommends the environments that are available in \SpecialChar LyX
3320 \begin_layout Standard
3321 The following environments—
3322 as well as the standard environments,
3324 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3335 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3357 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3368 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3379 \begin_inset Flex Code
3382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 \begin_inset Flex Code
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3401 \begin_layout Description
3402 Address This should be the author's permanent address.
3405 \begin_layout Description
3407 \begin_inset space ~
3410 Address This should be the author's temporary address at the time of submission,
3411 if different from the Address.
3414 \begin_layout Description
3415 Email Author's e-mail address
3418 \begin_layout Description
3419 URL Author's Web address,
3423 \begin_layout Description
3424 Keywords Key words or phrases used to identify specific topics discussed in the paper.
3427 \begin_layout Description
3428 Subjectclass These refer to the AMS Subject Classifications,
3429 published and described in
3431 Mathematical Reviews
3434 These are also available online at the AMS cites listed above.
3437 \begin_layout Description
3441 \begin_layout Description
3445 \begin_layout Description
3449 \begin_layout Standard
3450 The following environments are provided by both the
3451 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345566
3453 \begin_inset Flex Code
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3463 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345566
3471 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345580
3473 \begin_inset Flex Code
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345580
3491 in the latter case in both
3492 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084072
3496 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084073
3500 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084075
3504 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084077
3508 These same environments are provided only in the starred versions by the
3509 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345596
3511 \begin_inset Flex Code
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345596
3525 \change_inserted -712698321 1673084060
3533 \begin_layout Theorem
3534 This is typically used for the statements of major results.
3538 \begin_layout Corollary*
3539 This is used for statements which follow fairly directly from previous statements.
3541 these can be major results.
3546 These are smaller results needed to prove other statements.
3549 \begin_layout Proposition
3550 These are less major results which (hopefully) add to the general theory being discussed.
3553 \begin_layout Conjecture
3554 These are statements provided without justification,
3555 which the author does not know how to prove,
3556 but which seem to be true (to the author,
3560 \begin_layout Definition*
3561 Guess what this is for.
3562 The font is different for this environment than for the previous ones.
3566 \begin_layout Example*
3567 Used for examples illustrating proven results.
3570 \begin_layout Problem
3571 It's not really known what this is for.
3572 You should figure it out.
3575 \begin_layout Exercise*
3576 Write a description for this one.
3579 \begin_layout Remark
3580 This environment is also a type of theorem,
3581 usually a lesser sort of observation.
3584 \begin_layout Claim*
3585 Often used in the course of giving a proof of a larger result.
3590 these are used to break up long arguments,
3591 using specific instances of some condition.
3596 The numbering scheme for cases is on its own,
3597 not together with other numbered statements.
3602 At the end of this environment,
3603 a QED symbol (usually a square,
3604 but it can vary with different styles) is placed.
3605 If you want to have other environments within this one—
3608 and have the QED symbol appear only after them,
3609 then the other environments need to be nested within the proof environment.
3612 Nesting Environments
3618 for information on nesting.
3623 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345651
3624 Used in a way similar to Proposition,
3625 though perhaps lower on the scale.
3628 \begin_layout Standard
3629 And these environments are provided by
3630 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345684
3632 \begin_inset Flex Code
3635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 Theorems (AMS-Extended)
3642 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345689
3645 AMS Theorems (Extended
3652 \begin_layout Criterion*
3653 A required condition.
3656 \begin_layout Algorithm*
3657 A general procedure to be used.
3660 \begin_layout Axiom*
3661 This is a property or statement taken as true within the system being discussed.
3664 \begin_layout Condition*
3665 Sometimes used to state a condition assumed within the present context of discussion.
3669 Similar to a Remark.
3672 \begin_layout Notation*
3673 Used for the explanation of,
3678 \begin_layout Summary
3679 Do we really need to tell you?
3683 \begin_layout Acknowledgement*
3687 \begin_layout Conclusion*
3688 Sometimes used at the end of a long train of argument.
3689 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345729
3695 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345638
3696 Used in a way similar to Proposition,
3697 though perhaps lower on the scale.
3698 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345720
3702 \begin_layout Assumption*
3704 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345721
3708 \begin_layout Question*
3710 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345721
3714 \begin_layout Standard
3716 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345721
3717 There are ten more Maths modules available including several offering options ordered on
3719 (Numbered by Type \SpecialChar ldots
3727 \begin_layout Standard
3729 the AMS classes automatically provide the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
3730 and AMS fonts packages.
3731 They need to be available on your system in order to use these environments.
3734 \begin_layout Subsection
3736 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3739 name "subsec:Extra-font-sizes"
3746 \begin_layout Standard
3748 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3749 The “Extra font sizes” collection provides the document classes
3752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3755 (with extra font sizes)
3761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3764 (with extra font sizes)
3770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3773 (with extra font sizes)
3778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3781 (with extra font sizes)
3801 document classes respectively but offer the additional
3807 \begin_inset space ~
3820 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
3825 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3831 \begin_layout Subsection
3833 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3837 \begin_layout Standard
3839 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3840 The document classes
3843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3866 document classes to facilitate the use of Hebrew in \SpecialChar LyX
3870 \begin_layout Subsection
3872 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3875 name "subsec:Japanese"
3882 \begin_layout Standard
3884 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3885 The document classes
3886 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089024
3890 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089025
3892 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089025
3894 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3900 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089027
3902 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3909 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089041
3911 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089041
3913 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3919 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089044
3921 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3922 Standard Class Vertical Writing)
3926 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089041
3930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3933 (Japanese Standard Class)
3934 \change_inserted -712698321 1673088992
3935 Japanese Article (Standard Class)
3936 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3941 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089053
3945 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089053
3947 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089064
3949 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3955 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089067
3957 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3964 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089073
3966 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089270
3968 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3974 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089077
3976 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3977 Standard Class Vertical Writing)
3981 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089083
3985 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089083
3987 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3993 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089087
3995 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4000 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089094
4004 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089094
4006 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089094
4008 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4014 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089097
4016 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4020 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089104
4024 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089104
4026 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4032 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089107
4034 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4037 provide document classes for the Japanese language.
4040 \begin_layout Subsection
4042 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429136
4043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4045 name "subsec:KOMA-Script"
4052 \begin_layout Standard
4054 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429136
4064 and the \SpecialChar LyX
4066 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429136
4070 \begin_layout Standard
4072 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429136
4080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4082 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429161
4086 \begin_layout Standard
4088 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429162
4089 The KOMA-Script collection of document classes is a development of the Script classes created by Frank Neukam in the early 1990s;
4090 it was formally launched with the addition of a letter class in 1994.
4092 a second letter class has been added.
4093 Frank Neukam's classes were inspired by the principles of typography and this has been fully integrated into the design of the KOMA-Script classes.
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 The \SpecialChar LyX
4102 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089779
4105 article (koma-script)
4106 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089784
4113 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089790
4116 report (koma-script)
4117 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089794
4124 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089790
4132 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089771
4139 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089799
4143 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089802
4145 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089802
4149 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089811
4158 correspond to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4180 \begin_inset space ~
4183 of the Koma-Script family.
4184 They are replacements for the standard document classes
4204 and fit better to European typography conventions in a number of points.
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4209 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429262
4210 Standard character size is
4211 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429263
4212 The base character sizes when you select a KOMA-Script class are
4215 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089877
4218 article (koma-script)
4219 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089877
4226 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089886
4229 report (koma-script)
4230 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089886
4237 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089893
4241 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089893
4243 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429267
4250 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089903
4253 letter (koma-script)
4254 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089903
4262 \begin_layout Itemize
4264 labels of the description environment,
4265 and a number of elements of the
4266 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089925
4269 letter (koma-script)
4270 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089925
4275 document class are set in a bold sans serif font.
4279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 There is a big difference between the bold sans serif old cm fonts and new ec fonts,
4281 especially in the appearance of headings.
4283 the ec bold sans serif fonts look a bit thin.
4284 Here the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4293 helps to produce the
4294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4301 appearance when using the ec fonts.
4306 The numbering of chapter headings is made in the same way as the numbering of section headings,
4307 that is without the extra line
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4311 Chapter\SpecialChar ldots
4313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4318 the appearance of the headings can be modified by using a number of options (in \SpecialChar LyX
4319 to be entered in the field
4322 \begin_inset space ~
4329 Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4338 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429310
4339 The main means in the Koma-Script document classes to design the type area are the options
4347 (in \SpecialChar LyX
4348 to be entered in the extra class options field in the dialog
4350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4354 They make a clearer modification of page margins possible as do the options of the dialog
4356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4361 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4362 The layout of a KOMA-Script page follows one of two traditional typesetting conventions based on dividing the page into strips or drawing a circle.
4363 The default is to imagine that a page is divided horizontally and vertically into strips and allocate strips to the margins leaving the unused strips for the text area.
4364 You can change the sizes of the margins by changing the factor by which the page is divided into strips;
4365 the default for an A4 page is 9 and increasing this factor will produce increasingly narrower strips and therefore narrower margins.
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4372 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4373 Whatever the factor,
4374 two strips are allocated to the outer and bottom margins of a two-sided document and one strip to the inner and top margins,
4375 leaving a text area occupying around half the page.
4376 Since most two-sided documents have a binding,
4377 this can make the inner margins appear too narrow;
4378 so you can apply a binding correction to the page which is deducted before the size of the strips is calculated.
4382 \begin_layout Standard
4384 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4385 The main means in the Koma-Script document classes to design the type area are the options
4395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4396 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4397 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
4398 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
4405 \begin_layout Standard
4407 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4409 the binding correction is 7.5mm which is added in the form
4416 \begin_inset space ~
4419 options\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 To change the factor to 11,
4433 to the comma separated list of entries in the
4444 \begin_inset space ~
4450 If you want the default value of this factor for a page size other than A4,
4458 \begin_layout Standard
4460 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4461 To use the circle method of calculating the page layout,
4472 \begin_layout Itemize
4473 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
4474 document classes of the Koma-Script family define a number of additional commands.
4475 Those part of it which makes sense in \SpecialChar LyX
4476 is implemented in corresponding paragraph types.
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 Detailed descriptions of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4481 document classes of the Koma-Script family can be found in the Koma-Script documentation
4492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4494 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429358
4497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4499 name "subsec:article-(KOMA-Script),-report"
4504 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090826
4507 article (KOMA-Script)
4508 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090826
4512 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429358
4517 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090830
4518 report (KOMA-Script)
4519 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090840
4523 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429358
4528 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090835
4530 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090844
4534 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429367
4537 article (koma-script),
4538 report (koma-script),
4539 and book (koma-script)
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 The document classes
4546 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090858
4549 article (koma-script)
4550 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090858
4557 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090862
4560 report (koma-script)
4561 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090869
4568 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090866
4576 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090874
4581 are implemented in the layout files
4597 They contain all the paragraph types of the corresponding standard document classes
4614 with the exception of the \SpecialChar LyX
4620 which is replaced by the new
4624 -type having the same functionality.
4629 -Type there is a number of new paragraph types added.
4636 letter (koma-script)
4641 \begin_layout Itemize
4664 additionally inserting an entry in the table of contents.
4673 are not contained in
4675 article (koma-script)
4680 \begin_layout Itemize
4701 additionally clearing running heads.
4708 article (koma-script)
4714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4727 report (koma-script)
4730 but since this is identical to
4735 is has not been implemented in \SpecialChar LyX
4744 \begin_layout Itemize
4750 generates a heading directly above the following paragraph in the standard character size without affecting the structure of the document.
4753 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 are special captions which respect the different space settings needed for captions placed above or below an element (if you follow strict typographic rules,
4763 you might want to place table captions always above the table).
4764 You can also use the class option
4782 You need at least Koma-Script version 2.8q to use this.
4785 \begin_layout Itemize
4791 can be used to set a bonmot,
4793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4797 \begin_inset space \space{}
4800 at the beginning of a chapter.
4801 If you use the optional argument (
4803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
4805 \begin_inset space ~
4811 you can insert the dictum's author there.
4812 Dictum and author are separated by a line.
4813 You need at least Koma-Script version 2.8q to use this.
4820 article (koma-script)
4825 \begin_layout Standard
4826 The following types,
4827 together with the standard types
4842 form the title area of the document.
4843 They must be entered ahead of the first
4844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4856 The corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4857 commands must appear before the
4868 When such a type is used more than once,
4869 the latter usage overwrites the former one,
4871 for every type only the latest usage is valid.
4872 The order of the different types however has,
4888 no effect on the appearance of the produced document.
4891 \begin_layout Itemize
4897 produces a centered paragraph above the ordinary title (
4911 ) for the subject of the document.
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 produces a centered paragraph below the ordinary title (
4934 ) for the publishers' name.
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 report (koma-script)
4951 produces a centered paragraph on its own page behind the title page,
4954 article (koma-script)
4956 produces a centered paragraph below the ordinary title (
4978 \begin_layout Itemize
4984 produces a left aligned paragraph above the ordinary title (
5003 ) for a document`s head.
5006 \begin_layout Itemize
5012 produces in a double-sided print in
5014 report (koma-script)
5020 a left-aligned paragraph at the top of the title page`s back or has no effect in a single-sided print or in
5022 article (koma-script)
5027 \begin_layout Itemize
5033 produces in a double-sided print in
5035 report (koma-script)
5041 a left-aligned paragraph at the bottom of the title page`s back or has no effect in a single-sided print or in
5043 article (koma-script)
5048 \begin_layout Itemize
5055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5062 page ahead of the actual document containing a paragraph without special formatting.
5065 \begin_layout Standard
5067 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5068 KOMA-Script offers a wide range of
5075 \begin_inset space ~
5085 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
5090 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5092 \begin_inset space ~
5097 dialog which you can apply to the whole document,
5101 \begin_layout Description
5103 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5110 which produces a PDF with a small black box at the end any line in which a formatting error occurs;
5111 the default setting is
5116 \begin_layout Description
5118 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5125 which may take the values
5139 the first and last adjust the sizes of the headings to take account of page sizes where the default values may not be suitable
5142 \begin_layout Description
5144 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5151 which may take the values
5165 the first leaves it up to KOMA-Script to add periods after chapter,
5168 the second forces the addition of periods and third suppresses them
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5173 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5174 and the math options:
5177 \begin_layout Description
5179 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5186 which causes equations to be numbered on the left rather than on the right,
5190 \begin_layout Description
5192 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5199 which causes equations to be left justified rather than centered.
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5204 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5205 It also provides commands to affect the output of the document independently of the standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
5206 commands and packages;
5208 if you want your captions in bold add
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5218 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
5223 \begin_layout Standard
5225 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5231 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
5238 \SpecialChar menuseparator
5243 \begin_inset space ~
5248 ) and the problem is solved.
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5253 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5254 If you are writing a book,
5255 it is normal to have the preliminary pages numbered in Roman numerals and the Chapters in this part unnumbered.
5256 If you use the Chapter* environment,
5257 your Foreword and Preface will not appear in the Table of Contents;
5258 to make them to appear in the Table of contents,
5259 you need to use Chapter environments and add the \SpecialChar TeX
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5265 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5273 \begin_layout Standard
5275 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5276 at the very start of the book (not in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5280 \begin_layout Standard
5282 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5292 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5293 before the first chapter of the body of the text.
5295 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092640
5304 \begin_layout Standard
5306 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5307 You may also want to have some unnumbered Chapter environments at the end of the book after the Appendices,
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5314 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5315 Appendices are normally “numbered” with letters.
5320 If you use the Chapter* environment,
5321 they will not appear in the Table of Contents;
5322 so add the \SpecialChar TeX
5326 \begin_layout Standard
5328 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5338 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429682
5339 before the first of these headings and use the Chapter environment.
5340 These commands will have no effect on the numbering in \SpecialChar LyX
5342 only on the PDF output where the headings will be unnumbered and appear in the Table of Contents.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5346 The layout files for the document classes
5348 article (koma-script)
5353 report (koma-script)
5365 This is thought of as a place to define your own types.
5370 in your personal layout directory and edit the file!
5371 \change_deleted 564990737 1672430255
5375 \begin_layout Standard
5377 \change_deleted 564990737 1672430255
5378 letter (koma-script)
5381 \begin_layout Description
5383 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5385 This section discusses the obsolete
5387 KOMA-Script-Letter (v.
5388 \begin_inset space ~
5394 which is not even included anymore in recent KOMA releases.
5395 Please refer to the next section for the current KOMA-Script-Letter class (v.
5396 \begin_inset space ~
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5405 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5408 letter (koma-script)
5410 is implemented in the layout file
5415 It contains all the paragraph types of the corresponding standard document class
5421 with the exception of the \SpecialChar LyX
5436 which is replaced by the new
5443 in contrast to the standard document class,
5466 there are a number of new letter specific types.
5469 \begin_layout Standard
5471 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5472 The appearance of the letter produced by this document class can be controlled by a number of \SpecialChar LaTeX
5474 which you can put in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5481 the standard appearance of the letter`s heading,
5482 consisting of name and address,
5483 is quite self-willed.
5485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5492 heading is produced by the following \SpecialChar LaTeX
5493 commands in the preamble:
5496 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5506 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5522 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5532 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5552 A detailed German description of such \SpecialChar LaTeX
5553 commands can be found in the Koma-Script documentation
5559 the letter's author can produce his personal letter layout.
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5564 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5573 define the beginning of the letter and must be used in every letter.
5574 To emphasize them in the \SpecialChar LyX
5576 they are marked with the letter
5586 \begin_inset space ~
5590 It is possible to write any number of letters in one file.
5595 type produces a new letter using the same addressee and a
5599 type produces a new addressee.
5619 are ordinary paragraph types and can also be used several times in one and the same letter.
5622 \begin_layout Itemize
5624 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5630 produces a paragraph for the addressee and implicitly defines the beginning of the letter.
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5635 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5641 produces a paragraph for the form of address and implicitly produces a new letter.
5644 \begin_layout Itemize
5646 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5652 produces a paragraph for a close.
5655 \begin_layout Itemize
5657 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5663 produces a paragraph for a postscript.
5666 \begin_layout Itemize
5668 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5674 produces a paragraph for a distribution list.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5685 produces a paragraph for enclosures.
5688 \begin_layout Standard
5690 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5740 are input types provided with a label to enter information,
5741 which will be processed by the document class.
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5746 It could be seen as a matter of inconsequence,
5755 described above are not such input types as well.
5756 Because of the special meaning of those types,
5758 I have implemented them as ordinary paragraph types with a one letter mark in the left margin.
5760 it would affect my feeling of symmetry,
5769 type had such a serious different appearance.
5774 The types must be used ahead of the corresponding
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5783 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5784 An implementation of these types in a WYSIWYG fashion does not seem to make sense,
5785 because the real appearance of the produced letter does not only depend on the usage of the particular type,
5786 but also on other factors.
5788 a signature entered in the
5792 type will in the standard behavior appear in the produced letter only,
5793 when in the same letter also a
5798 The entered value of the
5802 type will in the standard behavior not appear in the produced letter at all.
5803 The possibility to design the letter`s heading freely is already indicated in a footnote above.
5806 \begin_layout Standard
5808 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5809 The input types can also be used as empty paragraphs.
5811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
5815 \begin_inset space \space{}
5827 type is not used at all,
5828 in the standard behavior the value of the
5832 type is used as signature,
5838 no signature value is defined.
5841 \begin_layout Standard
5843 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5844 By using the input types it is possible to write a letter template,
5845 containing filled input types with your personal dates (name,
5847 etc.) and empty input types for other dates you want to enter.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5852 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5859 in the standard behavior appears as a centered paragraph in small caps in the letter`s heading.
5862 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5871 in the standard behavior appears below the
5885 type appears instead.
5888 \begin_layout Itemize
5890 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5897 in the standard behavior appears in a centered paragraph in the letter`s heading below the sender's name.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5902 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5908 sender's telephone number,
5909 in the standard behavior only sets the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5921 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5927 place of the letter`s making.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5938 date of the letter`s making.
5948 in the standard behavior,
5949 produce the place and the date in a right-aligned line below the addressee's field.
5955 neither place nor date appear,
5956 independent of the value of the
5966 the date of the letter `s production is used.
5969 \begin_layout Itemize
5971 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5977 sender`s back address,
5978 in the standard behavior appears above the addressee's field in a small sans serif font.
5981 \begin_layout Itemize
5983 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5989 special mail information,
5990 in the standard behavior appears underlined above the addressee's field below the back address.
5993 \begin_layout Itemize
5995 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6001 additional information,
6002 in the standard behavior appears on right side below the addressee`s field.
6005 \begin_layout Itemize
6007 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6014 in the standard behavior appears in a big,
6016 sans serif font above the subject.
6019 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6027 the letter's subject,
6028 in the standard behavior appears in a bold font above the
6035 \begin_layout Standard
6037 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6062 produce a business letter like line above the
6066 line containing the fields
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6130 business letter types
6131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6139 type however does not appear,
6140 but only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6148 The ordinary output of place and date in a right-aligned line below the addressee`s field is suppressed.
6149 The types are implemented as input types provided with a label and must be used ahead of the corresponding
6156 \begin_layout Itemize
6158 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6167 \begin_layout Itemize
6169 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6178 \begin_layout Itemize
6180 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6189 \begin_layout Itemize
6191 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6200 \begin_layout Itemize
6202 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6215 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429773
6216 The new letter class:
6217 letter (koma-script v.2)
6218 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6222 name "subsec:The-new-letter"
6226 The new letter class:
6228 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092709
6230 \change_deleted -712698321 1673092710
6232 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092710
6234 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6236 \change_deleted -712698321 1673092713
6238 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092714
6240 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6243 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092715
6245 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6257 \begin_layout Standard
6258 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
6264 \begin_layout Standard
6266 Koma-Script version 2.8 has introduced a new letter class
6270 which supersedes the now unsupported
6276 on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6278 a completely new interface and is not compatible with the old class.
6282 though it is recommended you use the new class.
6285 \begin_layout Standard
6286 This class covers the same functionality as
6288 letter (koma-script),
6296 (receiver's address,
6316 will start a new letter (i.
6317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6321 \begin_inset space \space{}
6324 you can write several letters per document).
6325 New elements are sender's
6344 and the possibility to use a
6350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6357 The biggest improvement is,
6359 that the letter's layout is configurable to meet almost any needs.
6360 This can be done via the preamble or with a special style file (Letter Class Option,
6366 that will be read in as a class option.
6370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6371 The KOMA package comes with some default
6382 file that follows german typesetting rules,
6387 that provides the default layout of the old
6392 The latter can be loaded with the class option
6399 Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
6400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6409 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617922
6417 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617938
6418 that is included in \SpecialChar LyX
6420 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617997
6426 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6439 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
6440 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
6441 KOMA-Script Letter (V.2)
6446 A detailed description is to be found in the Koma-Script documentation (
6453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6457 \begin_layout Standard
6458 Visualizing the Koma-Script document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
6460 the \SpecialChar LyX
6461 internals cause some problems.
6464 \begin_layout Itemize
6465 The chapter number of a
6469 type appears on a line of its own above the chapter heading instead of appearing in the same line ahead of it.
6470 The cause for that is the \SpecialChar LyX
6471 internal behavior for the labeltype
6478 \begin_layout Itemize
6479 The headings of the types
6488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6497 but not in the \SpecialChar LyX
6500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6514 \begin_layout Itemize
6519 document class appear in a skip separation mode,
6521 This is the standard behavior,
6522 no special \SpecialChar LaTeX
6523 commands are needed for that.
6526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6529 dialog the corresponding radio button indicates
6538 value always has the effect that extra \SpecialChar LaTeX
6539 commands are inserted in the document to produce the gap,
6540 which is not what is wanted in this case.
6543 \begin_layout Subsection
6545 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743555
6546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6548 name "subsec:Polish-M.W.collection"
6553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6557 \begin_inset space \space{}
6561 \change_deleted 564990737 1670924933
6563 book (mwbk) and report (mwrep)
6564 \begin_inset Argument status
6567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6582 \begin_layout Standard
6588 \begin_layout Standard
6589 The \SpecialChar LyX
6591 \change_deleted -712698321 1673094342
6595 \change_inserted -712698321 1673094343
6596 Polish Article (MW Bundle)
6602 \change_deleted -712698321 1673094349
6606 \change_inserted -712698321 1673094356
6607 Polish Report (MW Bundle)
6612 \change_deleted -712698321 1673094352
6620 \change_inserted -712698321 1673094359
6621 Polish Book (MW Bundle)
6625 correspond to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6641 They are replacements for the standard document classes
6656 and fit better to Polish typography conventions in a number of points.
6660 \begin_layout Standard
6664 \begin_layout Itemize
6665 Unnumbered titles (with star,
6667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6671 \begin_inset space \space{}
6678 ) are added into table of contents,
6681 \begin_layout Itemize
6682 Additional page styles:
6686 \begin_layout Description
6687 uheadings header with separated lines,
6690 \begin_layout Description
6691 myheadings custom header,
6692 contents headers via commands:
6708 \begin_layout Description
6709 myuheadings custom header with separated lines,
6712 \begin_layout Description
6713 outer page number is placed on outer side of page
6717 \begin_layout Itemize
6722 \begin_layout Description
6723 rmheadings serif titles —
6727 \begin_layout Description
6728 sfheadings sansserif titles,
6731 \begin_layout Description
6732 authortitle on title page first placed is author next title —
6736 \begin_layout Description
6737 titleauthor on title page first placed is title next author,
6740 \begin_layout Description
6741 withmarginpar reserve place on page for margins.
6745 \begin_layout Subsection
6747 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652245
6751 \begin_layout Standard
6753 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652245
6754 The document classes
6755 \change_deleted -712698321 1673094404
6759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6763 \change_inserted -712698321 1673094404
6765 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652245
6769 \change_deleted -712698321 1673094408
6773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6777 \change_inserted -712698321 1673094411
6779 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652245
6791 Detailed information about these document classes can be found in
6793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
6794 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
6795 Books\SpecialChar menuseparator
6800 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
6801 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
6802 Handouts\SpecialChar menuseparator
6808 \begin_layout Section
6810 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439534
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6816 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794710
6817 See also the document classes in the Collections (section
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6824 reference "sec:Collections"
6832 \begin_layout Subsection
6834 \change_deleted -712698321 1673095198
6836 \change_inserted -712698321 1673095198
6837 Astronomy & Astrophysics
6838 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6842 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6850 updated by the \SpecialChar LyX
6854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6856 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6862 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6863 This section describes how \SpecialChar LyX
6864 can be used to write articles for submission to the scientific journal
6867 \change_deleted -712698321 1673095254
6869 \change_inserted -712698321 1673095254
6871 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
6878 target "http://ftp.edpsciences.org/pub/aa/aa-package.zip"
6883 ) using Version 9.1 of the document class
6888 information about it is available at
6889 \begin_inset Flex URL
6892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6896 https://www.aanda.org/for-authors/latex-issues/texnical-background-information
6906 \begin_layout Standard
6908 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6909 A manual comes together with the package and should be consulted before installing this document class as described in the
6911 Installing New Document Classe
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6923 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6929 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6930 Please note that the publisher of the journal was changed from Springer to EDP Sciences starting January 1,
6932 That change also involved some slight changes to the style files,
6933 namely the removal of the thesaurus command.
6934 If you have an older version installed,
6936 For information about compatibility with the old (version 4) layout,
6937 please refer to the comments in
6940 Dir/layouts/aapaper.layout
6950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6952 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617129
6959 It is recommended you start from the template in the menu
6964 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
6966 \begin_inset space ~
6974 \begin_inset space ~
6977 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
6978 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
6979 Astronomy & Astrophysics
6982 If you are not using the template,
6983 note the following settings:
6986 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6990 \change_deleted -712698321 1673095619
6994 \change_inserted -712698321 1673095619
6995 Astronomy & Astrophysics
6996 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7004 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
7009 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
7011 \begin_inset space ~
7017 that one was obvious).
7020 \begin_layout Itemize
7022 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7026 \begin_inset space ~
7038 \begin_inset space ~
7049 The whole layout is done by the macros,
7050 you shouldn't change anything.
7053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7055 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7059 \begin_layout Standard
7061 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7062 First thing to enter is the header information.
7064 \change_deleted -712698321 1673167006
7066 \change_inserted -712698321 1673167007
7068 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7070 of which one is optional.
7074 \begin_layout Itemize
7076 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7085 \begin_layout Itemize
7087 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7096 \begin_layout Itemize
7098 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7107 \begin_layout Itemize
7109 \change_deleted -712698321 1673167065
7113 \change_inserted -712698321 1673167065
7115 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7120 \change_inserted -712698321 1673167087
7124 \begin_layout Itemize
7126 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168577
7132 Determines to whom correspondence and reprints are to be sent.
7135 \begin_layout Itemize
7137 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168590
7142 [optional] Snail mail address for contacts.
7143 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7147 \begin_layout Itemize
7149 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7163 \begin_layout Standard
7165 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168612
7166 There is no need to issue the
7173 this is done automatically by \SpecialChar LyX
7174 when the header is finished.
7176 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7177 Although the order of the single header entries doesn't matter it is advised to keep the above sequence,
7178 just to get the best optics and meets the layout of the real document.
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7183 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7184 If you want to place footnotes in the header block,
7186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7190 \begin_inset space \space{}
7193 to state your present address,
7194 just use the standard footnote via the menu
7199 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7208 will automagically use the term
7215 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168649
7219 \begin_layout Standard
7221 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168649
7224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7228 you'll find two insets which are relevant for the titling:
7231 \begin_layout Itemize
7233 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168649
7240 to mark corresponding author\SpecialChar breakableslash
7242 The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
7247 so you have to put a marker to each author.
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168649
7257 to supply an email address for fast contact.
7258 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7262 \begin_layout Standard
7264 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7265 In addition to these topics,
7266 the macros use three additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
7267 commands that have no counterpart in \SpecialChar LyX
7271 \begin_layout Itemize
7273 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7280 to separate different names for more than one author and institute,
7284 \begin_layout Itemize
7286 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168671
7293 to mark corresponding author/institute pairs.
7294 The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
7299 so you have to put a marker to each author.
7302 \begin_layout Itemize
7304 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168671
7311 to supply an email address for fast contact.
7312 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7316 \begin_layout Standard
7318 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168684
7321 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168684
7323 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642374
7324 he appropriate command has to be entered as \SpecialChar TeX
7325 code in \SpecialChar LyX
7327 See the examples in the template and in
7329 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
7330 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
7331 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
7332 Astronomy & Astrophysics
7339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7341 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7347 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168754
7348 The abstract should immediately follow the header block.
7349 With version 5 the abstract environment was changed to a command,
7350 and there is now a restriction to only one paragraph.
7352 it should contain an entry with the keywords.
7353 This is done via the paragraph style
7358 Refer to the example paper.
7359 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7360 The abstract should immediately follow the header block and must contain five tokens:
7370 \begin_layout Enumerate
7372 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7377 (optional) {} leave it empty if necessary
7380 \begin_layout Enumerate
7382 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7390 \begin_layout Enumerate
7392 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7400 \begin_layout Enumerate
7402 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7410 \begin_layout Enumerate
7412 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7417 (optional) {} leave it empty if necessary
7420 \begin_layout Standard
7422 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168754
7424 This structure not shown in
7429 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7435 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7436 Supported environments
7439 \begin_layout Standard
7441 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7442 The A&A paper layout supports the following environments for structuring your text:
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7447 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7450 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
7453 \begin_layout Itemize
7455 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7461 \begin_layout Itemize
7463 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7469 \begin_layout Itemize
7471 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7477 \begin_layout Itemize
7479 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7485 \begin_layout Itemize
7487 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7493 \begin_layout Itemize
7495 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7501 \begin_layout Itemize
7503 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7509 \begin_layout Itemize
7511 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7517 \begin_layout Itemize
7519 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7525 \begin_layout Itemize
7527 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7533 \begin_layout Itemize
7535 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169058
7541 \begin_layout Itemize
7543 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169078
7552 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7556 \begin_layout Itemize
7558 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7564 \begin_layout Itemize
7566 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7572 \begin_layout Itemize
7574 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7580 \begin_layout Itemize
7582 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7588 \begin_layout Itemize
7590 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7596 \begin_layout Itemize
7598 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7604 \begin_layout Itemize
7606 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7612 \begin_layout Itemize
7614 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7620 \begin_layout Itemize
7622 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7628 \begin_layout Itemize
7630 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7636 \begin_layout Itemize
7638 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169058
7643 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7647 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7649 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7650 Commands not supported by \SpecialChar LyX
7654 \begin_layout Standard
7656 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7657 Some commands are not yet supported by the
7658 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169117
7662 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169117
7663 Astronomy & Astrophysics
7664 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7667 layout for \SpecialChar LyX
7669 Some have already been mentioned.
7670 For the sake of completeness,
7671 they are listed all together here:
7674 \begin_layout Itemize
7676 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7684 \begin_layout Itemize
7686 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168793
7694 \begin_layout Itemize
7696 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168793
7704 \begin_layout Itemize
7706 \change_inserted -712698321 1673168793
7712 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168793
7718 \begin_layout Itemize
7720 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168793
7728 \begin_layout Itemize
7730 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168793
7738 \begin_layout Itemize
7740 \change_deleted -712698321 1673168793
7746 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7750 \begin_layout Standard
7752 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7753 If you want to use any of these commands,
7754 you have to enter them yourself.
7755 Do not forget to use
7761 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7764 \begin_inset space ~
7772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7774 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7775 Figure and Table Floats
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7780 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7782 provides support for the necessary float environments
7793 therefore we won't tell much about it here.
7797 \begin_inset space ~
7803 Just remember that tables should be left-aligned.
7805 select the table and change the alignment in
7810 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7816 \begin_inset space ~
7820 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169201
7826 arg "layout-paragraph"
7830 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7836 \begin_layout Standard
7838 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7839 There is only one special thing:
7840 the figures with a caption beside the figure.
7841 To create such a figure,
7842 you have to do the following:
7845 \begin_layout Enumerate
7847 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7848 Create a wide figure float:
7854 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7859 t\SpecialChar menuseparator
7864 from within the float,
7870 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7876 \begin_inset space ~
7887 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_layout Enumerate
7901 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7902 Enter your caption text.
7905 \begin_layout Enumerate
7907 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7912 to move the cursor above the caption.
7915 \begin_layout Enumerate
7917 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7921 \begin_layout Enumerate
7923 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7924 Position the cursor after the figure and insert a horizontal fill by using the menu:
7930 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7935 rmatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7941 \begin_inset space ~
7950 dialog and select the
7962 \change_deleted -712698321 1673169720
7964 \change_inserted -712698321 1673169724
7966 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7970 \begin_layout Enumerate
7972 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7973 Switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7978 \begin_inset space ~
7986 \begin_layout Enumerate
7988 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7997 Do not close the brace!
8000 \begin_layout Enumerate
8002 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
8003 Position the cursor behind the caption text,
8004 switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8005 mode and insert the closing brace:
8009 \begin_inset space ~
8021 \begin_layout Standard
8023 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642458
8025 refer to the figures in the file in
8027 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
8028 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
8029 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
8030 Astronomy & Astrophysics
8035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8037 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8043 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
8045 the paper has to be formatted in a special double-spacing layout.
8047 you have to add the option
8058 \begin_inset space ~
8068 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
8073 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
8075 \begin_inset space ~
8084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8086 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
8090 \begin_layout Standard
8092 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642520
8095 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
8096 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
8097 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
8098 Astronomy & Astrophysics
8100 was written with \SpecialChar LyX
8102 It is the example paper from the original macro package,
8108 \begin_inset CommandInset href
8111 target "http://ftp.edpsciences.org/pub/aa/aa-package.zip"
8117 but translated to \SpecialChar LyX
8118 using the older unstructured abstract type.
8119 Use it for inspiration,
8120 and compare the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8125 with the \SpecialChar LyX
8129 \begin_layout Subsection
8134 \begin_layout Standard
8140 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8144 \begin_layout Standard
8146 is a set of macros produced by the American Astronomical Society to facilitate electronic manuscript submission to the three journals they publish:
8147 the Astrophysical Journal (including the Letters and Supplement),
8148 the Astronomical Journal,
8149 and the Publications of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific.
8151 has proven to be an excellent tool for generating these documents,
8152 especially given its equation,
8154 and figure handling capabilities.
8156 requires version 5.0 (or higher) of these macros;
8158 which is the version described here,
8160 Versions prior to 5.0 are intended for use with \SpecialChar LaTeX
8161 2.09 and are fundamentally incompatible with \SpecialChar LyX
8163 The AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8164 package may be downloaded from the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8168 \begin_layout Standard
8169 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
8175 \begin_layout Standard
8177 \begin_inset Flex URL
8180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8182 https://aas.org/aastex/aastex-downloads
8190 \begin_layout Standard
8191 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8198 A complete user guide is contained in that package and you should familiarize yourself with it thoroughly before embarking on writing a paper in \SpecialChar LyX
8201 will not reduce the need to figure out all the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8203 it will only reduce the drudgery of typing everything in.
8204 It is your responsibility to ensure that the final exported \SpecialChar LaTeX
8205 document conforms completely to the requirements of the journal to which you are submitting your paper.
8208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8209 Starting a New Paper
8212 \begin_layout Standard
8213 I strongly suggest that you start with the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
8223 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617265
8224 \SpecialChar menuseparator
8225 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
8226 American Astronomical Society
8227 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617310
8231 enter the new file name,
8239 This will show the most common fields found in a manuscript.
8240 Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
8245 ) with the correct information.
8246 Many of the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8247 commands and environments can be implemented directly in \SpecialChar LyX
8250 For commands such as these,
8251 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8252 code must be entered directly and marked as such.
8253 Such commands are referred to as \SpecialChar TeX
8256 I tried to minimize the amount of \SpecialChar TeX
8257 code needed in an AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 Finishing Your Paper
8265 \begin_layout Standard
8266 When the paper is finished to your satisfaction and previews/prints correctly,
8268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8275 actions which need to be done before you submit it to the journals.
8279 \begin_layout Enumerate
8280 Export your paper as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8283 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
8284 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
8292 \begin_layout Enumerate
8297 file with your favorite text editor
8301 \begin_layout Enumerate
8302 remove the comment lines before the
8311 \begin_layout Enumerate
8316 usepackage...{fontenc}
8318 line if it appears (usually just after
8334 \begin_layout Enumerate
8335 remove everything between (and including) the
8348 except for any commands you specifically put into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8349 preamble (which should appear immediately after the
8350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8353 User specified \SpecialChar LaTeX
8355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8366 \begin_layout Enumerate
8367 Run the resulting file through \SpecialChar LaTeX
8368 to make sure it still processes correctly.
8371 \begin_layout Enumerate
8372 Reread the journal requirements to make sure your filenames and formats are correct.
8375 \begin_layout Enumerate
8379 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8380 Comments On Specific Commands
8383 \begin_layout Standard
8384 I will not describe the detailed usage of the individual AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8386 the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8391 ) gives a good description of each.
8392 Thus it's probably easiest for me to go down the list as found in the guide and offer comments where necessary.
8393 So let's begin \SpecialChar ldots
8397 \begin_layout Paragraph
8398 Things that work as expected
8401 \begin_layout Standard
8402 Because they work as you might expect,
8403 I simply list them and the section they are found in:
8520 begin{thebibliography}
8530 all the cite commands and their variations (2.13.2),
8531 the generic graphicx figure commands (2.14.1),
8560 amongst other places),
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 The following style options also work correctly:
8618 Simply put them in the
8624 Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
8630 \begin_layout Paragraph
8632 but require more comment
8635 \begin_layout Standard
8636 The following items work,
8637 but require a little more discussion:
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 These items are reserved for use by the journal editors,
8642 but you can put them into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8643 preamble if you feel compelled to do so:
8681 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 These items may be placed in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8684 and are included as blanks in the template file:
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 (2.3) – can only be used
8716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8724 not in the middle of a paragraph.
8725 Use \SpecialChar TeX
8726 code if you need to embed it.
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 (2.3) – will have extra {} after it.
8737 This should not cause an error.
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 (2.6) – can only be used
8748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8756 not in the middle of a paragraph.
8757 Use \SpecialChar TeX
8758 code if you need to embed it.
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 (2.8) – can't insert a cross-reference tag,
8769 you must type the tag name by hand
8772 \begin_layout Itemize
8786 \begin_layout Itemize
8793 (2.9) – will have extra {} after it.
8794 This should not cause an error.
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8804 (2.11) – will have extra {} after it.
8805 This should not cause an error.
8808 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 (2.14.2) – you can insert an optional filename argument by placing the cursor at the beginning of the text and selecting
8817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8829 inserts an optional argument of the type needed by
8836 Hopefully it will be renamed someday.
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8852 for the catalog ID optional parameter
8855 \begin_layout Itemize
8868 for the catalog ID optional parameter
8871 \begin_layout Paragraph
8872 Things not implemented,
8873 use \SpecialChar TeX
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8889 setcounter{equation}
8892 Journal name abbreviations (2.13.4),
8935 insert it as the first element in the lefthand cell after where you want it.
8936 Don't use any of \SpecialChar LyX
8937 's rules in the table),
9012 \begin_layout Paragraph
9013 Things that cannot be implemented
9016 \begin_layout Standard
9018 at least in any meaningful sort of way,
9019 so I suggest ignoring them.
9020 They are the references environment (2.13.3),
9021 and the deluxetable environment (2.15).
9023 really need to use deluxetable,
9024 I suggest editing it in a separate file with a text editor,
9027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9029 \begin_inset space ~
9034 to include it in your \SpecialChar LyX
9037 \change_deleted 564990737 1671642564
9043 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642618
9046 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
9047 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
9048 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
9049 American Astronomical Society
9054 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642621
9060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9064 and Other Ruminations
9067 \begin_layout Paragraph
9068 Getting \SpecialChar LyX
9069 and AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9073 \begin_layout Standard
9074 It can be a bit tricky to get \SpecialChar LyX
9075 to recognize a new layout and document class.
9076 When all else fails,
9080 \begin_layout Enumerate
9081 Make certain that \SpecialChar LaTeX
9082 can find AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9084 Copy sample.tex (and perhaps table.tex) from the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9085 distribution into a directory completely unrelated to \SpecialChar LaTeX
9086 or AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9087 and run \SpecialChar LaTeX
9095 \begin_layout Enumerate
9100 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
9108 \begin_layout Enumerate
9111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
9116 then restart \SpecialChar LyX
9120 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 Open a regular new file,
9122 not from a template.
9124 \change_deleted -712698321 1673170671
9127 \change_inserted -712698321 1673170671
9130 American Astronomical Society (AASTeX V.
9131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9138 appear in the class list in
9140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 If you get a warning from an existing AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9148 document about not being able to find the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9149 layout or a message about
9150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9153 You should not mix title layouts with normal ones
9154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9158 things haven't been installed correctly.
9161 \begin_layout Paragraph
9163 error processing a table
9166 \begin_layout Standard
9170 attempts to center the table caption/title.
9171 This seems to produce a bad interaction in AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9172 so you should click somewhere in the caption/title,
9175 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9177 \begin_inset space ~
9192 This took care of it for me.
9195 \begin_layout Paragraph
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \change_inserted -712698321 1673170733
9206 \begin_layout Enumerate
9208 \change_deleted -712698321 1673170736
9211 I have noticed some funny spacing in the reference entries in the text.
9212 When you enter the bibliography item data,
9217 space between the last author and the parenthesis setting off the year;
9221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9225 \begin_inset space \space{}
9241 \change_deleted -712698321 1673170741
9243 \change_inserted -712698321 1673170741
9247 \begin_layout Enumerate
9248 Entering the references at all is not obvious.
9249 The easiest thing is to start typing your first reference at the end of the document,
9250 then mark it as type
9255 That will put a small gray box in front of what you just typed.
9256 Click on the box to fill in the rest of the information.
9258 go to the end of an existing reference and press return.
9259 That will create a new line with its own box,
9263 \begin_layout Paragraph
9267 \begin_layout Standard
9268 Even though AAS\SpecialChar TeX
9269 provides its own figure commands (
9277 I much prefer \SpecialChar LaTeX
9278 's standard figure commands (with the default graphicx).
9287 \begin_inset space ~
9290 commands as \SpecialChar TeX
9291 code into a Figure Float box if you desire,
9292 but I never have much luck getting the layout right.
9293 With the standard graphics,
9299 usepackage{graphicx}
9301 command into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9302 preamble and handle the figures in the standard \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
9304 interspersing the figures in the text.
9305 I believe ApJ accepts figures exactly this way now;
9306 AJ might still use the
9307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9310 stack everything at the end
9311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9317 \begin_layout Paragraph
9318 Things I could have done,
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9331 things I could have implemented,
9334 I saw no point in double-spacing the text in the \SpecialChar LyX
9336 even though it is double-spaced in the paper manuscript.
9338 I chose not to make separate layouts for the preprint and preprint2 styles.
9339 Since I assume you will spend most of your time in the plain manuscript mode anyway,
9340 I decided not to chew up more disk space with this.
9344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9348 \begin_layout Standard
9349 Your mileage may vary.
9350 I've now had papers published by both ApJ and AJ that have had 98% of the effort done in \SpecialChar LyX
9352 the last 2% was the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9353 post-processing and a few cleanups.
9354 I have had no trouble with the submission process,
9355 and I'm sure the journals were never aware that there might be a difference.
9357 go forth and publish!
9360 \begin_layout Subsection
9362 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442131
9366 \begin_layout Standard
9368 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9370 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171415
9374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9378 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9380 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171417
9382 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9386 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171421
9392 \change_inserted -712698321 1673171424
9394 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9395 document class together with the
9396 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171428
9398 \change_inserted -712698321 1673171429
9400 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9404 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171431
9406 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9409 to facilitate the description of chess games.
9412 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
9413 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
9414 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
9428 \begin_layout Subsection
9430 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042028
9434 \begin_layout Standard
9436 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9438 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171640
9442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9446 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9448 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171643
9450 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9454 \change_inserted -712698321 1673171717
9456 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9460 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171720
9462 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9466 \change_deleted -712698321 1673171728
9468 \change_inserted -712698321 1673171728
9471 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9473 \change_inserted -712698321 1673171744
9474 for journals in the Elsevier publishing house
9475 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9477 This provides the following additional environments:
9481 \begin_inset space ~
9490 \begin_inset space ~
9499 \begin_inset space ~
9520 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172045
9524 \begin_layout Standard
9526 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9527 A template is available in the menu
9532 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
9534 \begin_inset space ~
9542 \begin_inset space ~
9545 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
9546 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
9550 It has been customized with further environments and contains all the information you may need.
9552 the documentation is also available from
9553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
9556 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc.pdf"
9564 \begin_layout Subsection
9566 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042046
9570 \begin_layout Standard
9572 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042046
9574 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172423
9578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9582 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172423
9583 Paper (Standard Class)
9584 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172423
9586 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042046
9589 provides an alternative to the
9590 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172092
9594 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172435
9597 Article (Standard Class)
9598 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042046
9602 It provides similar functionality,
9603 but you might prefer this layout with sans serif sections,
9608 \begin_layout Subsection
9613 \begin_layout Standard
9619 \begin_layout Standard
9620 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
9626 \begin_layout Standard
9631 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172482
9633 \begin_inset space ~
9637 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172487
9639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9646 textclass works with the American Physical Sociey's Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9648 \begin_inset Formula $\beta$
9655 \begin_layout Standard
9660 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172511
9662 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172517
9668 which works with Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9671 v3.1 is basically obsolete,
9672 as it works with \SpecialChar LaTeX
9674 That means that it doesn't interact very well with \SpecialChar LyX
9676 which requires \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
9678 although it has been kludged to work.
9679 Since Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9680 4.0 has been designed to work much more cleanly with \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
9684 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172538
9689 \begin_inset space ~
9693 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172538
9695 \begin_inset space ~
9699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9706 textclass should also be pretty easy to use.
9709 \begin_layout Standard
9710 These documents are supposed to be used in
9714 to the Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9716 so we don't describe any of the special Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9718 and assume you'll know what to put in the preamble if necessary.
9721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9725 \begin_layout Standard
9726 All you need to do is install Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9728 as described in the package's README file.
9729 The package can be found at The Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9731 \begin_inset Flex URL
9734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9736 http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/
9742 Install it somewhere that \SpecialChar LaTeX
9744 Test it by trying to \SpecialChar LaTeX
9745 a short Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9746 4 document in some random directory (i.
9747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9751 \begin_inset space \space{}
9754 not the directory where you installed the class file.) Then,
9755 if you reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
9757 it will find the class file and let you use the Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9761 \begin_layout Standard
9762 Probably the easiest way to get started is either to import a Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9771 \begin_inset space ~
9778 \change_deleted -712698321 1673172641
9779 the templates directory
9780 \change_inserted -712698321 1673172687
9783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
9784 New From Templates\SpecialChar menuseparator
9792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9796 \begin_layout Standard
9797 Optional arguments to
9805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9824 \begin_inset space ~
9832 \begin_inset space ~
9839 Remember that in Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9841 at least one optional argument is required!
9845 \begin_layout Standard
9846 Other preamble matter,
9854 \begin_inset space ~
9861 \begin_inset space ~
9870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9874 \begin_layout Standard
9875 The layouts basically correspond to the commands in Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9878 the Email layout corresponds to
9885 Note that (at least as of Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9895 layouts are exactly equivalent,
9896 so you shouldn't need to use both.
9900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9901 In case you're curious,
9902 both were included so that
9906 would be able to translate both
9926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9930 \begin_layout Standard
9931 There are a couple of important unique aspects of Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9932 4 which might cause bugs that will be even more confusing in \SpecialChar LyX
9936 \begin_layout Standard
9937 In Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9956 The \SpecialChar LyX
9957 equivalent is that there is a separate Thanks layout.
9962 write footnotes in the
9967 or weird things may happen.
9968 See the Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9969 4 documentation for more details.
9972 \begin_layout Standard
9977 \begin_inset space ~
9986 \begin_inset space ~
9996 layouts must be placed
10004 layout and the corresponding
10022 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
10026 \begin_layout Subsection
10028 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042072
10032 \begin_layout Standard
10034 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042072
10039 classes were replaced
10040 \change_deleted -712698321 1673176131
10042 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042072
10043 with a completely new
10044 \change_deleted -712698321 1673175919
10050 This package provides a \SpecialChar LaTeX
10051 class and templates for books to be published at Springer Gabler Research,
10052 Springer Vieweg Research,
10053 Springer Spektrum Research,
10054 Springer VS Research,
10055 or Springer VS Forschung.
10056 The documentation is available in German from
10057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10060 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf"
10067 \change_inserted -712698321 1673176125
10074 Please find information at
10075 \begin_inset Flex URL
10078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10080 \change_inserted -712698321 1673176047
10082 https://www.springernature.com/gp/authors/campaigns/latex-author-support
10090 Native \SpecialChar LyX
10091 support is not available yet.
10092 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042072
10096 \begin_layout Section
10098 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439560
10102 \begin_layout Standard
10104 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439581
10105 See also the document classes in the Collections (section
10106 \begin_inset space ~
10110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10112 reference "sec:Collections"
10120 \begin_layout Subsection
10124 \begin_layout Standard
10130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10134 \begin_layout Standard
10135 Memoir is a very powerful and constantly evolving class.
10136 It has been designed with regard to fictional and non-fictional literature.
10137 Its aim is to let the user have maximum control over the typesetting of his document.
10138 Memoir is based on the standard book class,
10139 but it can also emulate the article class (see below).
10142 \begin_layout Standard
10144 the developer of Memoir,
10145 is known as the author of lots of useful packages in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
10147 Most of them have been merged with Memoir.
10149 it is much easier to layout the table of contents,
10151 chapter designs and such.
10155 does not support all of these goodies natively.
10156 Some of them might be added to forthcoming releases
10160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10161 You are invited to send suggestions to
10162 \begin_inset Flex URL
10165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10167 lyx-devel@lists.lyx.org
10178 lots will probably never be supported,
10179 due to the limitations of \SpecialChar LyX
10181 Of course you can still use all features with the help of some native \SpecialChar LaTeX
10182 commands (\SpecialChar TeX
10187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 \begin_inset space ~
10206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10208 reference "sec:Inserting-TeX-Code"
10220 we can only list those features that are natively supported by \SpecialChar LyX
10222 For detailed descriptions (and for the rest of features) we recommend you have a look at the detailed manual of the Memoir class
10226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10241 \begin_inset Flex URL
10244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10246 CTAN:/macros/latex/memoir/memman.pdf
10257 which is not only a user guide for the class,
10258 but also both a comprehensive description on good typesetting and a superb example for good typesetting itself.
10261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10262 Basic features and restrictions
10265 \begin_layout Standard
10266 Memoir supports basically all features of the standard book classes.
10273 \begin_layout Description
10275 \begin_inset space ~
10279 Memoir has a broader range of font sizes:
10288 \begin_layout Description
10290 \begin_inset space ~
10294 The fancy page style is not supported,
10295 due to a command clash between Memoir and the fancyhdr package (they both define a command with the same name,
10296 which confuses \SpecialChar LaTeX
10299 Memoir comes with a number of its own page styles (see
10301 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
10302 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
10304 \begin_inset space ~
10310 If you want to use these for the chapter pages,
10311 you have to use the command
10317 in the main text or in preamble (e.
10318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10322 \begin_inset space \space{}
10329 chapterstyle{companion}
10334 \begin_layout Description
10336 Sectionings (chapter,
10338 subsection etc.) come with an optional argument in the standard classes.
10340 you can specify an alternative version of the title for the table of contents and the headers (for instance,
10341 if the title is too long).
10342 In \SpecialChar LyX
10344 you can do this via
10346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10348 \begin_inset space ~
10353 at the beginning of a chapter/section.
10354 Memoir features a second optional argument and thus separates the table of contents from the header.
10355 You can define three variants of a title with this:
10356 one for the main text,
10357 one for the table of contents,
10358 and one for the headers.
10360 makes these available in form of specific
10371 \begin_layout Description
10373 In the standard classes (and in many other classes),
10374 the table of contents,
10375 the list of figures and the list of table start a new page automatically.
10376 Memoir does not follow this route.
10377 You have to insert a page break yourself,
10378 if you want to have one.
10381 \begin_layout Description
10383 For some unknown reason,
10384 Memoir uses pagination on the title page (in the standard classes,
10386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10394 If you want an empty title page,
10399 aliaspagestyle{title}{empty}
10404 \begin_layout Description
10406 With the class option
10412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
10413 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
10414 Class Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
10416 \begin_inset space ~
10422 you can emulate article style.
10424 counters (footnotes,
10426 tables etc.) will not be reset on new chapters,
10427 chapters don't start a new page (but are—
10429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10440 use their own page,
10444 \begin_layout Description
10447 Memoir does not allow the use of the deprecated font commands,
10448 which have been used in the old \SpecialChar LaTeX
10450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10454 \begin_inset space \space{}
10471 It produces an error and stops \SpecialChar LaTeX
10472 whenever such a command appears.
10477 reallows the commands and spits out warnings instead (which does at least not stop \SpecialChar LaTeX
10479 Since a lot of packages and particularly Bib\SpecialChar TeX
10480 style files are still using those commands,
10481 we have decided to use this option by default.
10484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10488 \begin_layout Standard
10489 We will only describe the features supported by \SpecialChar LyX
10490 (which is not much currently).
10491 Please consult the Memoir manual
10495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10510 \begin_inset Flex URL
10513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10515 CTAN:/macros/latex/memoir/memman.pdf
10528 \begin_layout Description
10530 You may wonder why an abstract is an extra feature.
10532 it is in book class.
10533 Usually books don't have abstracts.
10537 You can use it wherever and how often you like.
10540 \begin_layout Description
10542 You may know this older typesetting style:
10543 The contents of a chapter are summarized below the title and also in the table of contents (e.
10544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10548 \begin_inset space \space{}
10553 Our hero arrives in Troia;
10554 he loses some friends;
10558 Chapterprecis does exactly this.
10559 It is therefore only sensible below a chapter.
10562 \begin_layout Description
10564 An epigraph is a smart slogan or motto at the beginning of a chapter.
10565 The epigraph environment provides an elegant way of typesetting such a motto.
10566 The motto itself (text) and its (optional) author (source) are divided by a short line.
10567 The author (source) can be inserted via
10569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10576 \begin_layout Description
10578 Memoir has lots of possibilities to typeset poetry (up to very complex figurative poems).
10580 can only support a few of them.
10582 which is a centered title for poems,
10583 which will also be added to the table of contents (verse is the standard environment for poems.
10584 Memoir has some enhanced versions of verse,
10585 but you need to use \SpecialChar TeX
10587 because they have to be nested inside regular verse environments,
10588 which is not possible with \SpecialChar LyX
10592 \begin_layout Description
10595 but it adds no entry to the table of contents.
10598 \begin_layout Subsection
10600 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10604 \begin_layout Standard
10606 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10619 document class but adds two environments:
10622 \begin_layout Description
10624 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10625 Recipe a numbered section environment at the
10629 level which generates a bold centered heading above a double horizontal rule
10632 \begin_layout Description
10634 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10645 are what are being described and the environment ends with a horizontal rule.
10648 \begin_layout Standard
10650 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642866
10653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10654 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 Books\SpecialChar menuseparator
10658 illustrates its use.
10661 \begin_layout Standard
10663 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10664 It is designed for typesetting one or two recipes per page,
10665 with dimensions of 5.5
10666 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
10670 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
10674 The hyperlinked table of contents (ToC) and page numbers make browsing recipes convenient,
10675 and the pages can be joined together or printed 2 per page to normal letterpaper easily.
10676 The size was chosen to work in half-page 3-ring binder cover sheets,
10677 because un-laminated paper just doesn't last in the kitchen.
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10682 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10683 The half-letter pages can be printed two per page using your printer driver,
10684 or bound together using
10686 pdfjam --nup 2x1 --papersize '{11in,8.5in}'
10696 is the compiled version of your recipes.
10697 \change_inserted -712698321 1673175424
10701 \begin_layout Section
10703 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442207
10707 \begin_layout Subsection
10709 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10713 \begin_layout Standard
10715 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642942
10719 \begin_inset space \space{}
10723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10733 an unofficial implementation of the ‘Europass CV’ recommended by the European Commission in 2013.
10736 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10737 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10738 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10741 offers guidance on its use.
10742 Its documentation is available from
10743 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10746 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/europasscv/europasscv.pdf"
10754 \begin_layout Subsection
10756 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10760 \begin_layout Standard
10762 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642984
10766 \begin_inset space \space{}
10770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10780 an unofficial implementation of the “Europass CV” recommended by the European Commission in 2002.
10783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10784 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10785 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10788 offers guidance on its use.
10789 Its documentation is available from
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10793 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/europecv/europecv.pdf"
10801 \begin_layout Subsection
10803 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10807 \begin_layout Standard
10809 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643003
10813 \begin_inset space \space{}
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10827 This allows the creation of customizable CVs.
10830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10831 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10832 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 offers guidance on its use.
10836 Its documentation is available from
10837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10840 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/moderncv/manual/moderncv_userguide.pdf"
10848 \begin_layout Subsection
10850 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10856 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643024
10860 \begin_inset space \space{}
10864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10874 originally developed for use with \SpecialChar LyX
10878 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10879 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10880 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10883 offers guidance on its use.
10884 Its documentation is available from
10885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10888 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/simplecv/simplecv.pdf"
10896 \begin_layout Section
10898 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652454
10902 \begin_layout Standard
10904 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652455
10908 \begin_inset space \space{}
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10920 reference "subsec:The-new-letter"
10928 \begin_inset space \space{}
10931 (with extra font sizes)
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10940 reference "subsec:Extra-font-sizes"
10945 ) document classes .
10948 \begin_layout Subsection
10950 \change_inserted 564990737 1671041970
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10956 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617528
10965 document class for writing letters according to the
10967 Deutsches Institut für Normung
10970 The file in the menu
10975 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10988 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10989 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
10992 offers guidance on its use.
10993 The documentation is available from
10994 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10997 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/dinbrief/liesmich"
11005 \begin_layout Subsection
11007 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
11011 \begin_layout Standard
11013 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
11017 \begin_inset space \space{}
11026 document class for writing letters according to French conventions.
11027 The file in the menu
11032 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
11034 \begin_inset space ~
11042 \begin_inset space ~
11045 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
11046 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
11048 \begin_inset space \space{}
11053 offers guidance on its use.
11056 \begin_layout Subsection
11058 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11064 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11077 document class for writing letters in German.
11078 The file in the menu
11083 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11093 \begin_inset space ~
11096 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
11097 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
11099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11104 offers guidance on its use.
11105 The documentation is available from
11106 \begin_inset CommandInset href
11109 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/g-brief/g-brief.pdf"
11117 \begin_layout Subsection
11119 \change_inserted 564990737 1671458835
11123 \begin_layout Standard
11125 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617591
11134 document class for English letters and to create mailing labels.
11135 The file in the menu
11140 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
11142 \begin_inset space ~
11150 \begin_inset space ~
11153 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
11154 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
11155 Letter (Standard Class)
11157 offers guidance on its use.
11160 \begin_layout Subsection
11162 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652527
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11168 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652527
11172 \begin_inset space \space{}
11181 document class for writing letters,
11182 faxes and envelopes in French.
11183 The file in the menu
11188 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
11190 \begin_inset space ~
11198 \begin_inset space ~
11201 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
11202 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
11204 \begin_inset space \space{}
11209 offers guidance on its use.
11210 The documentation is available from
11211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
11214 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/lettre/lettre.pdf"
11222 \begin_layout Section
11224 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439660
11228 \begin_layout Subsection
11230 \change_inserted 564990737 1671458922
11234 \begin_layout Standard
11236 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617655
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 document class for creating presentations.
11250 The file in the menu
11255 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
11257 \begin_inset space ~
11265 \begin_inset space ~
11268 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
11269 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
11272 offers guidance on its use.
11273 The documentation is available from
11274 \begin_inset CommandInset href
11277 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf"
11285 \begin_layout Subsection
11288 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11301 \begin_layout Standard
11303 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743383
11309 updated by the \SpecialChar LyX
11313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11315 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743383
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11321 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743396
11325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11328 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11335 document class to make slides for overhead projectors.
11336 There are two document classes that can do this:
11340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 document class (section
11346 \begin_inset space ~
11350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11352 reference "sec:slitex"
11362 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11366 As of 2023 the former has continued to be maintained whereas
11368 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11371 has not been maintained since 2008.
11372 This section documents the latter.
11373 If your machine doesn’t have the
11376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11379 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11382 document class installed,
11383 you’ll probably have to use the
11386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 If you want to install the
11397 it is available from
11398 \begin_inset CommandInset href
11401 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/foiltex"
11407 You should also read the
11409 Installing New Document Classes
11416 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743436
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11424 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11428 \begin_layout Standard
11430 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11431 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
11432 to make slides for overhead projectors.
11433 There are two document classes that can do this:
11434 the default slides class and the
11436 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11440 This section documents the latter.
11443 \begin_layout Standard
11445 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11446 I'm going to say this again,
11448 so that there's no misunderstanding:
11451 \begin_layout Standard
11453 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11454 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
11460 \begin_layout Standard
11463 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11466 This section documents the class
11467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11483 \begin_layout Standard
11485 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11486 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11494 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11495 If you're looking for the documentation for
11496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11515 reference "sec:slitex"
11521 If your machine doesn't have the
11530 you'll probably have to use the default
11535 which isn't quite as good as
11540 \begin_layout Standard
11542 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11547 class is designed for use with version
11548 \begin_inset space ~
11556 class file which is now an integral part of \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
11562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11566 \begin_layout Standard
11568 to use this document class,
11580 \begin_inset space ~
11586 There are some settings in the
11589 \begin_inset space ~
11594 dialog that you should know about that are specific to this class:
11597 \begin_layout Itemize
11598 Don't change the options
11609 \begin_inset space ~
11615 They're ignored by the
11622 \begin_layout Itemize
11623 The default font size is 20
11624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11627 pt with the other options being 17
11628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11643 \begin_layout Itemize
11644 The default font is
11652 but all math equations are still typeset in the usual roman font.
11655 \begin_layout Itemize
11658 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11661 supports A4 and Letter paper sizes as well as a special size for working with 35
11662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11666 It doesn't support A5,
11668 legal or executive paper sizes.
11671 \begin_layout Itemize
11672 Don't bother changing the
11676 settings because they are ignored anyway.
11677 All floats appear where they are defined in the text.
11680 \begin_layout Itemize
11685 setting behaves a bit differently for this class.
11688 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11691 provides extensive footer and header capabilities including a user-defined logo.
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11699 reference "sec:foilfoot"
11705 The title page is treated differently to all other pages in the document and is
11713 has the logo centered at the bottom of the page (if one is defined).
11714 The possible page style choices and what they do are as follows:
11718 \begin_layout Labeling
11719 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11726 The final output contains no page numbers,
11727 or other headers or footers (except footnotes of course).
11731 \begin_layout Labeling
11732 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11739 The final output contains page numbers centered at the bottom of the page.
11740 No other headings or footers (other than footnotes).
11743 \begin_layout Labeling
11744 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11749 Page numbers in lower right corner.
11750 Additional headers and footers are also shown.
11751 This is also the default.
11754 \begin_layout Labeling
11755 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11760 Gives you access to the
11764 package although its use with
11766 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11769 is discouraged by the writer of the
11771 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11774 package because of some potential page layout clashes.
11778 \begin_layout Paragraph
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 The following options may be used in the extra class options in the
11785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 \begin_layout Labeling
11792 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11797 This sets up the page layout for 7.33
11798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11806 which is about the same aspect ratio as a 35
11807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11811 making it a bit easier to work with this medium.
11814 \begin_layout Labeling
11815 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11820 Places a rule across the page below the header on every page except the title page.
11823 \begin_layout Labeling
11824 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11829 Places a rule across the page above the footer on every page except the title page.
11832 \begin_layout Labeling
11833 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11838 This is automatically set each time you create a new
11845 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11848 to use the dvips driver to rotate those pages that are set as landscape foils.
11851 \begin_layout Labeling
11852 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11857 Simply changes the page dimensions to those of a landscape page but doesn't do any rotation.
11858 Thus if you use this option you need to use an external program to rotate each page or feed your paper through your printer as landscape.
11859 Note that this option effectively reverses the roles of the
11867 environments (don't worry these are described in the next section).
11870 \begin_layout Labeling
11871 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11876 Equation numbers on the left.
11879 \begin_layout Labeling
11880 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11885 Flush-left equations.
11888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11889 Supported Environments
11892 \begin_layout Standard
11893 Most of the environments commonly supported in other classes are also supported by the
11898 There are several additional environments provided by
11900 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11903 as well as a couple added by \SpecialChar LyX
11905 The following environments are shared with other classes:
11908 \begin_layout Standard
11909 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
11912 \begin_layout Itemize
11918 \begin_layout Itemize
11924 \begin_layout Itemize
11930 \begin_layout Itemize
11936 \begin_layout Itemize
11942 \begin_layout Itemize
11949 \begin_layout Itemize
11955 \begin_layout Itemize
11961 \begin_layout Itemize
11967 \begin_layout Itemize
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 \begin_layout Itemize
12008 \begin_layout Standard
12010 all the major environments apart from the sectioning environments.
12011 Since foils are essentially self-contained sections,
12012 with a title and body,
12015 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12018 provides specific commands for starting new foils and these are:
12021 \begin_layout Itemize
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12035 also provides slightly modified versions of these two environments called:
12038 \begin_layout Itemize
12044 \begin_layout Itemize
12047 ShortRotatefoilhead
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12051 and the differences will be explained in the next section.
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12055 Since foils are often used in presenting ideas or new theorems and such
12057 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12060 also provides a comprehensive box of goodies for presenting them:
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12064 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
12067 \begin_layout Itemize
12073 \begin_layout Itemize
12079 \begin_layout Itemize
12085 \begin_layout Itemize
12091 \begin_layout Itemize
12097 \begin_layout Itemize
12103 \begin_layout Itemize
12109 \begin_layout Itemize
12115 \begin_layout Itemize
12121 \begin_layout Itemize
12127 \begin_layout Itemize
12138 \begin_layout Standard
12139 The starred versions are unnumbered while the unstarred versions are numbered.
12140 There are also two list environments added by \SpecialChar LyX
12144 \begin_layout Itemize
12150 \begin_layout Itemize
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12162 provides some powerful header and footer capabilities that are best set in the preamble although they may be set at any point in a document.
12163 If you want to change these settings in your document the best place to do so is at the very top of a foil,
12165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12171 \begin_inset space \space{}
12176 straight after the foilhead.
12179 \begin_layout Standard
12181 the following command styles are provided [
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
12192 \begin_layout Itemize
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12202 \begin_layout Itemize
12208 \begin_layout Itemize
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12218 \begin_layout Itemize
12222 \begin_inset space ~
12228 \begin_layout Itemize
12232 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12240 \begin_inset space ~
12252 \begin_layout Standard
12253 There are also a few commands provided by
12255 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12258 that aren't directly supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12259 but I'll tell you what they do and how to use them in section
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12266 reference "sec:unsuppfoils"
12274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12275 Building a Set of Foils
12278 \begin_layout Standard
12279 This section will give a simple introduction to using the different environments to build a set of foils.
12280 If you want to see an example set of foils,
12282 \change_deleted 564990737 1671643085
12287 file you find in \SpecialChar LyX
12293 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643099
12296 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
12297 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
12298 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
12306 \begin_layout Paragraph
12307 Give It a Title Page
12310 \begin_layout Standard
12311 Unlike other classes that provide
12334 creates the title on a page of its own.
12335 If you leave out the
12339 environment \SpecialChar LaTeX
12340 will substitute the current date (every time you regenerate the output).
12343 \begin_layout Paragraph
12347 \begin_layout Standard
12348 As I mentioned earlier,
12349 there are four ways of starting a new foil.
12350 For portrait foils you should use
12359 The difference between these two environments is the amount of space between the title of the foil (the foilhead) and the body of the foil.
12362 \begin_layout Standard
12363 Landscape foils are generated using the
12369 ShortRotatefoilhead
12372 Again the only difference is the spacing between foilhead and body.
12373 Both of the short versions have 0.5
12374 \begin_inset space ~
12377 inches less separation between the foilhead and the body.
12381 \begin_layout Standard
12382 One problem with the support for landscape foils is the requirement that you have to use the
12386 driver to generate the PostScript output otherwise the foils won't be rotated.
12387 It is possible to get landscape foils even if you haven't got the
12391 driver provided you can feed your foils sideways through your printer ;-)
12394 \begin_layout Paragraph
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 You can't have two of the same type of these environments directly following each other.
12402 If you use a normal paragraph break,
12404 you will just be extending the previous environment as if you had merged the two environments together.
12406 you need to insert a so-called separator.
12407 Please refer to the section entitled
12418 \begin_layout Paragraph
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 You get all the commonly supported list styles found in other classes as well as two new ones.
12424 I'll only describe the new ones here.
12425 If you want to find out more about the other list environments check out the
12430 If you intend to use itemized lists you might also want to read about the
12433 \begin_inset space ~
12437 \begin_inset space ~
12442 dialog described above in section
12443 \begin_inset space ~
12447 \change_inserted 564990737 1671355684
12449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12451 reference "chap:bullets"
12457 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355684
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12461 reference "sec:bullet"
12471 \begin_layout Standard
12472 The two new list styles,
12482 are designed to make it easier for you to create lists of do's and don'ts or right and wrong by providing dedicated environments that use a tick or a cross as the label of the list.
12483 These lists are in fact dedicated variants of the
12488 They do however require that you have the
12492 packages installed.
12495 \begin_layout Paragraph
12499 \begin_layout Standard
12502 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12505 redefines the floating tables and figures so that they appear exactly where they are in the text rather than pushing them to the top of the page or to some user specified location.
12506 In fact if you change the float placement settings they are simply ignored.
12509 \begin_layout Paragraph
12510 Page Headers and Footers
12511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12513 name "sec:foilfoot"
12520 \begin_layout Standard
12524 \begin_inset space ~
12533 are two commands used to control the left-footer text string.
12534 The first is meant to allow you to include a graphic logo on your foils and defaults to
12535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12540 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12548 While the second is meant to provide a classification for the audience,
12552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12558 \begin_inset space \space{}
12562 It is empty by default.
12565 \begin_layout Standard
12566 The remaining page corners can be filled by
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12574 (which defaults to page numbers),
12578 \begin_inset space ~
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12594 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12597 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12603 name "sec:unsuppfoils"
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 All the commands mentioned below need to be set in a
12621 within another environment.
12624 \begin_layout Paragraph
12628 \begin_layout Standard
12629 All lengths are adjusted using the
12652 should be replaced by the name given to the length you want to change and
12656 is the length value.
12657 All lengths should be specified in units of length such as inches (
12670 ) or relative to some document or font-based length such as
12680 \begin_layout Standard
12681 It's possible to change the spacing between a foilhead and the body of the foil by adjusting the length specified by
12694 \begin_inset space \space{}
12697 in closer to their bodies put the following in the preamble:
12704 foilheadskip}{-0.5in}
12707 \begin_layout Standard
12708 The spacings around floats can be adjusted by setting these lengths:
12711 \begin_layout Labeling
12712 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12719 Separation between the text and the top of the float
12722 \begin_layout Labeling
12723 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12730 Separation between the float and the caption
12733 \begin_layout Labeling
12734 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12741 Separation between the caption and the following text
12744 \begin_layout Labeling
12745 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12752 You can make the captions narrower than the surrounding text by adjusting this length.
12753 Best done relative to
12762 \begin_layout Standard
12763 There are also several title page related lengths that you may find useful if you have a long title or several authors:
12766 \begin_layout Labeling
12767 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12774 Separation from headers to
12779 \begin_layout Labeling
12780 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12798 \begin_layout Labeling
12799 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12813 \begin_layout Labeling
12814 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12830 \begin_layout Labeling
12831 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12847 \begin_layout Standard
12848 The last length related command affects all the list environments.
12859 a list environment then all the vertical spacing between the list items is removed.
12860 Note that this is a command not a length so it doesn't require
12866 like the stuff mentioned above.
12869 \begin_layout Paragraph
12870 Headers and Footers
12873 \begin_layout Standard
12886 commands control whether the logo in the
12890 definition appear on a given page.
12897 in the preamble then none of the foils will have the logo on them.
12898 If you don't want the logo on a particular page place the
12904 directly after the foilhead of that page and the
12910 directly after the next foilhead.
12913 \begin_layout Standard
12914 If you decide to use the
12918 page style setting in the
12921 \begin_inset space ~
12926 dialog you should probably add
12936 to your preamble so headers and footers on landscape pages are correctly placed when rotated.
12937 This is due to some clashes between the page layouts provided by the
12948 \begin_layout Subsection
12950 \change_inserted 564990737 1671459032
12954 \begin_layout Standard
12956 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643165
12960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12969 document class for creating presentations.
12972 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
12973 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
12974 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
12977 offers guidance on its use.
12978 The documentation is available from
12979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
12982 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot/doc/powerdot.pdf"
12990 \begin_layout Subsection
12992 \change_inserted 564990737 1671459032
12993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12995 name "subsec:Seminar"
13004 \begin_layout Standard
13006 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643194
13010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13019 document class for creating presentations.
13022 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
13023 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
13024 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
13027 offers guidance on its use.
13028 The documentation is available from
13029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
13032 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/seminar/doc/seminar-doc.pdf"
13040 \begin_layout Subsection
13043 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
13047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13056 \begin_layout Standard
13058 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743492
13064 updated by the \SpecialChar LyX
13068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13070 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743492
13074 \begin_layout Standard
13076 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743492
13077 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
13078 to make slides for overhead projectors.
13079 There are two document classes that can do this:
13083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13088 document class and the
13091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13094 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
13098 This section documents the former.
13099 If you’re looking for the documentation for
13102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13105 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13116 reference "sec:Foiltex"
13122 As of 2023 the former has continued to be maintained whereas
13124 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
13127 has not been maintained since 2008.
13129 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13139 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13143 \begin_layout Standard
13145 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13146 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
13147 to make slides for overhead projectors.
13148 There are two document classes that can do this:
13149 the default slides class and the
13151 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
13155 This section documents the former.
13158 \begin_layout Standard
13160 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13161 I'm going to say this again,
13163 so that there's no misunderstanding:
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13168 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13169 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13175 \begin_layout Standard
13178 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13181 This section documents the class
13182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13198 \begin_layout Standard
13200 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13201 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13207 \begin_layout Standard
13209 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13210 If you're looking for the documentation for
13211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13216 slides (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
13220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13231 reference "sec:foiltex"
13242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13247 slides (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
13251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13254 ] is actually somewhat better than the default
13262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13264 or so I've been told repeatedly by its advocates.
13265 Having never used it,
13266 I have no idea if this claim is true or not.
13271 which this section documents.
13274 \begin_layout Standard
13276 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
13277 This class is the \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
13278 improvement of the old
13280 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
13284 Every \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
13285 distribution includes this class [which I'll just refer to as
13286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13298 so you're bound to have it.
13299 As I noted earlier,
13300 there are other classes,
13306 which also produce slides for overhead projectors and do a better job at it.
13308 there are some things which
13312 can do which the others can't,
13313 such as generate overlays.
13314 Read on to learn more!
13319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13323 name "sec:slidesetup"
13330 \begin_layout Standard
13332 to use this document class,
13334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13345 from the class list in the
13347 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13351 There are some other special things you should know about this class:
13354 \begin_layout Itemize
13355 Don't bother changing the options
13360 They're not supported by the
13368 \begin_layout Itemize
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13377 behaves a bit differently for this class.
13378 The possible choices and what they do are as follows:
13382 \begin_layout Description
13387 The final output contains page numbers in the lower right corner.
13390 \begin_layout Description
13400 but also prints out any time markers you've put in.
13401 This is the default.
13404 \begin_layout Description
13409 The final output contains no page numbers,
13411 or alignment markers.
13415 \begin_layout Itemize
13420 class has an extra option:
13428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13439 in the extra class options.
13443 \begin_layout Standard
13444 Using this options allows you to add time markers to
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13456 reference "sec:slideNote"
13465 \begin_layout Standard
13466 You can also use the template file
13467 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617694
13469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13482 to automatically set up a document to use the
13487 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617699
13492 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset space ~
13502 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617723
13503 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13504 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
13509 to open your new document
13510 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617728
13514 The template file also contains some examples of the special paragraph environments used by this class.
13515 I'll describe those next.
13518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13519 Paragraph Environments
13522 \begin_layout Paragraph
13523 Supported Environments
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13527 The first thing you'll notice when you start up a new
13531 document is the font size and type:
13532 it's the equivalent of the size
13533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13553 This is also what's used in the output.
13555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13562 to remind you that this is a slide.
13563 Your final slides will use a larger font;
13565 you'll have less space.
13567 the larger default screen font isn't WYSIWYG,
13571 \begin_layout Standard
13572 The next thing that becomes obvious is the changes to the paragraph environment pull-down box [at the far-left end of the toolbar].
13573 Most of the paragraph environments you're used to seeing are missing.
13574 There are also five new ones.
13579 class itself only supports certain paragraph environments:
13582 \begin_layout Itemize
13588 \begin_layout Itemize
13594 \begin_layout Itemize
13600 \begin_layout Itemize
13606 \begin_layout Itemize
13612 \begin_layout Itemize
13618 \begin_layout Itemize
13624 \begin_layout Itemize
13630 \begin_layout Itemize
13636 \begin_layout Itemize
13643 \begin_layout Standard
13644 All of the other standard environments,
13645 including the section-heading environments,
13653 \begin_layout Standard
13655 you'll notice the following new environments:
13658 \begin_layout Itemize
13664 \begin_layout Itemize
13670 \begin_layout Itemize
13676 \begin_layout Itemize
13682 \begin_layout Itemize
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 These five are kind of quirky,
13691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13698 in \SpecialChar LyX
13702 doesn't permit you to nest any other paragraph environment into an empty environment.
13704 that's fine and dandy,
13705 but it means that you wouldn't be able to start a slide with anything except plain text.
13707 I've performed a little
13708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13719 \begin_layout Paragraph
13720 Quirks of the New Environments
13721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13723 name "sec:slideQuirk"
13730 \begin_layout Standard
13731 All five of the new paragraph environments are somewhat quirky due to inherent limitiations in the current version of \SpecialChar LyX
13733 As I just mentioned,
13735 forbids environments that begin with another environment.
13736 To get around this,
13741 environment isn't a paragraph environment as described in the
13749 \begin_layout Standard
13750 You should consider
13765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13768 pseudo-environments.
13769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13772 They look like a section heading or a
13773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13784 but really begin a [and,
13786 end the previous] paragraph environment.
13797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13804 These two perform some action.
13807 \begin_layout Standard
13808 A common feature of all five environments,
13833 is a rather long-ish label.
13834 The text following this label —
13835 ordinarily the contents of the paragraph environment —
13836 is utterly irrelevant for
13861 completely ignores it.
13863 you can leave these five environments completely empty.
13867 \begin_layout Standard
13872 to put any text after the rather long-ish label,
13874 This could be a short description of the contents of the
13881 enter your descriptive comment and hit
13885 as you normally would.
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13891 you don't want to enter any descriptive text,
13892 you'll hit another \SpecialChar LyX
13898 and will not let you start a new paragraph environment until you put something in the old one.
13903 \begin_layout Itemize
13904 Start entering the text that will
13935 \begin_layout Itemize
13936 Now move to the beginning of that paragraph.
13940 \begin_layout Itemize
13950 \begin_layout Itemize
13953 empty paragraph to a
13980 \begin_layout Standard
13981 Some future version of \SpecialChar LyX
13984 resolve this quirkiness\SpecialChar ldots
13988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13989 Making a Presentation with
14003 \begin_layout Paragraph
14011 \begin_layout Standard
14012 If you're expecting this section to teach you how to actually make a presentation,
14013 you'll be sorely disappointed.
14015 I'll describe all of the ways the
14019 class can assist you in preparing the materials for a presentation.
14020 Filling in the contents,
14028 the \SpecialChar LyX
14032 \begin_layout Standard
14037 environment [in the manner described in section
14038 \begin_inset space ~
14042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14044 reference "sec:slideQuirk"
14049 ] tells \SpecialChar LyX
14050 to begin a new slide [duh].
14051 The label for this environment/
14052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14068 followed by the label,
14070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14078 Any text or paragraph environments that follow this one go on the new slide.
14082 \begin_layout Standard
14083 Slides are probably the only time you'll need to forcibly end pages in \SpecialChar LyX
14084 (this can be specified in the
14091 once you finish entering the contents of one slide.
14092 If you've entered more text than can physically fit on a slide,
14093 the extra overflows onto a new slide.
14094 I don't recommend doing this,
14096 since the overflow slide won't have any page number on it.
14098 it may interfere with any
14102 you've made to accompany the oversized
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14118 environments work the same way as the
14123 They both create an
14124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14131 followed by a label [
14132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14149 The color is a stunning magenta instead of blue,
14151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14158 will look different,
14159 in style and in length.
14160 The label fonts of all three also differ from one another.
14163 \begin_layout Standard
14169 if the contents of a
14177 exceed the physical size of a slide or sheet of paper,
14178 the extra will overflow onto a new sheet.
14180 you should avoid this.
14181 It defeats the whole purpose of
14192 \begin_layout Paragraph
14202 \begin_layout Standard
14207 is a slide that sits atop another slide.
14208 Perhaps you wish to discuss a figure on the main
14212 before displaying the text associated with it.
14213 One way to accomplish this is tape a flap of dark paper over the part of the
14217 you want to display later.
14220 if you wish to overlap one graph with another,
14222 You would then have to fumble while speaking to align the two separate,
14227 s to align the two graphs.
14232 environment in both cases makes life much easier.
14235 \begin_layout Standard
14240 receives the page number of its
14241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14315 \begin_inset space ~
14318 appended to the page number of the parent
14329 you want the contents of both the
14337 to each fit on a single physical slide!
14338 You should probably consider an
14343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14356 the \SpecialChar LyX
14361 class provides a visual cue for this:
14362 the label at the start of an
14366 is shorter than that at the start of a
14372 when you generate printable output,
14373 you'll find alignment markers in all four corners of both the
14377 page and its parent
14382 These will assist you in lining up the two physical slides.
14385 \begin_layout Standard
14386 The major problem in overlaying two slides is aligning the contents of the two transparencies.
14387 How much space should you leave for that graph on the second slide?
14389 what if you want a graph and a sentence on second slide,
14390 but there is text on the main transparency that goes in between them?
14391 You could try and insert vertical space of the right size.
14392 The better way is to use
14403 \begin_layout Standard
14404 As their names imply,
14413 are two command-like paragraph environments that make all subsequent text invisible and visible,
14416 \begin_inset space ~
14420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14422 reference "sec:slideQuirk"
14427 that you don't place anything
14431 these two environments,
14438 it inserts a centered,
14439 sky-blue label into the page reading
14440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 <Invisible Text Follows>
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14448 For paragraphs following this label,
14458 it doesn't matter which] where they would be contain instead blank space.
14462 \begin_layout Standard
14468 the corresponding centered label is
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14472 <Visible Text Follows>
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14477 Paragraphs following this label behave normally.
14478 Note that the beginning of a new
14492 automatically shuts off an
14497 It's therefore not necessary to use
14508 \begin_layout Standard
14510 it should be obvious how to create overlay transparencies using the proper combination of
14529 \begin_layout Enumerate
14535 including everything that will appear on it,
14536 whether on the main slide or on the
14543 \begin_layout Enumerate
14544 Before each figure or paragraph that will appear only on the
14559 environment after the
14566 \begin_layout Enumerate
14571 immediately following the
14578 \begin_layout Enumerate
14579 Copy the contents of this
14590 \begin_layout Enumerate
14607 \begin_layout Standard
14609 You've just made an
14616 \begin_layout Standard
14617 There's one problem with the way I've designed the \SpecialChar LyX
14623 you can't make text in the middle of a paragraph invisible,
14624 nor make text in the middle of an invisible paragraph visible again.
14625 To accomplish this feat,
14626 you'll need to use some inlined \SpecialChar LaTeX
14631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14632 The commands of interest are:
14636 \begin_layout Itemize
14641 invisible \SpecialChar ldots
14645 \begin_layout Itemize
14650 visible \SpecialChar ldots
14654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14656 and need to be marked as \SpecialChar TeX
14659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14666 you wish to change goes in between the brackets [and after the
14679 If you don't know how to mark text as \SpecialChar TeX
14681 see the appropriate section of the
14693 \begin_layout Paragraph
14703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14705 name "sec:slideNote"
14712 \begin_layout Standard
14722 is associated with a
14723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14737 the \SpecialChar LyX
14742 class provides visual cues.
14747 is shorter than that of a
14751 [yet longer than that of an
14756 like the label of an
14760 is shockingly magenta.
14766 has the page number of its
14767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14819 You can have multiple
14823 s associated with a single
14838 you'll probably want to break up long
14842 s so that they fit on a single sheet of paper.
14845 \begin_layout Standard
14851 it contains anything additional you might want to say about a
14856 It could also be used as a sheet of reminders for a particular
14861 In the case of the latter,
14862 you might want to make use of time markers.
14864 the \SpecialChar LyX
14870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14877 support for time markers,
14880 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
14885 you'll have to resort to using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14889 \begin_layout Standard
14890 To use time markers,
14891 you'll need to specify the extra class option
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14904 \begin_inset space ~
14908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14910 reference "sec:slidesetup"
14916 This option turns on timing marks,
14917 which will appear in the lower-left-hand corner of every
14922 To set what appears in the time marker,
14923 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14953 The arguments of both commands are time measured in seconds.
14955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14968 sets the time marker to a given time.
14970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14983 increments the time marker by the specified amount.
14984 Using time markers and
14989 you can remind yourself how much time to spend on a particular
14996 \begin_layout Standard
14997 There's one last feature to describe.
14999 you'd like to print out all of your
15007 s on transparencies while printing all of your
15025 with which it is associated.
15026 What's a person to do?
15029 \begin_layout Standard
15031 there are two \SpecialChar LaTeX
15032 commands that allow you to select what to print out.
15033 Both must be placed into the preamble of your document.
15035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15050 will cause the output to contain only the
15061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 prevents the output of anything but
15081 I'd advise placing both commands in the preamble and initially comment both out.
15082 You can then preview your entire presentation as you write.
15083 When you're done writing,
15084 you can then uncomment one of the two to select what you want to print.
15085 I like to uncomment
15086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15102 print to a file with
15103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15115 comment it back out,
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 I can then send either file to a printer,
15146 loading transparencies or plain paper as appropriate.
15149 \begin_layout Standard
15150 You can also provide other arguments to the
15151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 See a good \SpecialChar LaTeX
15183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15188 Class Template File
15191 \begin_layout Standard
15192 I have also provided a template file
15193 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617750
15196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15216 begin your new presentation with
15218 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15220 \begin_inset space ~
15224 \begin_inset space ~
15228 \change_inserted 564990737 1671616988
15229 \SpecialChar menuseparator
15230 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
15236 Your new \SpecialChar LyX
15237 presentation file will contain an example
15258 additionally contain an example of the use of
15268 the preamble will contain:
15271 \begin_layout LyX-Code
15272 % Uncomment to print out only slides and overlays
15275 \begin_layout LyX-Code
15279 \begin_layout LyX-Code
15285 \begin_inset Newline newline
15291 \begin_layout LyX-Code
15292 % Uncomment to print out only notes
15295 \begin_layout LyX-Code
15299 \begin_layout LyX-Code
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15309 I created this class to support the \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
15311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
15320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15324 one of the built-in \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
15326 Neither I nor the rest of the \SpecialChar LyX
15327 Team endorse or oppose the use of this built-in slide class.
15328 It's here if you want it or need it.
15329 There exist other \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
15330 classes for creating presentations,
15336 \begin_inset space ~
15340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15342 reference "sec:foiltex"
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 package [present on some \SpecialChar TeX
15361 The latter is not yet supported under \SpecialChar LyX
15366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15367 Perhaps you can take on the task\SpecialChar ldots
15373 I know nothing about these other classes.
15374 Try them out to see what sort of alternative they provide.
15377 \begin_layout Section
15379 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439661
15383 \begin_layout Subsection
15385 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439661
15389 \begin_layout Standard
15391 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439661
15400 document class for preparing reports.
15406 this provides parts,
15407 chapters and sections but does not provide the paragraph styles needed for a book;
15413 it provides the abstract paragraph style.
15415 it does not start a new chapter on the right hand page.
15418 \begin_layout Standard
15420 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743528
15425 document classes are described in the Collections (section
15426 \begin_inset space ~
15430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15432 reference "sec:Collections"
15440 \begin_layout Standard
15442 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743530
15446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15449 (Japanese in vertical writing)
15454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15461 \begin_inset space ~
15465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15467 reference "subsec:Japanese"
15475 \begin_layout Standard
15477 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743530
15481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15488 \begin_inset space ~
15492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15494 reference "subsec:KOMA-Script"
15502 \begin_layout Standard
15504 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743530
15508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15511 (with extra font sizes)
15515 \begin_inset space ~
15519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15521 reference "subsec:Extra-font-sizes"
15529 \begin_layout Standard
15531 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743569
15535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15538 (Polish version by M.
15539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15546 \begin_inset space ~
15550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15552 reference "subsec:Polish-M.W.collection"
15563 \begin_layout Section
15565 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439674
15569 \begin_layout Subsection
15573 \begin_layout Standard
15579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15583 \begin_layout Standard
15584 Broadway is for writing plays.
15585 The format is more decorative than Hollywood,
15586 and much less standardized.
15587 This format should be suitable for workshops.
15590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15594 \begin_layout Standard
15595 The same as in Hollywood.
15598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15602 \begin_layout Standard
15607 names as labels then cross-reference the label to insert the name.
15608 The cross-reference dialog will show the current cast of characters.
15611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15612 Paper size and Margins
15615 \begin_layout Standard
15623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15627 \begin_layout Standard
15628 The following environments are available.
15629 You can use broadway.bind to get the bind keys shown at the right.
15632 \begin_layout Itemize
15636 \begin_inset Newline newline
15641 You should not have to use this,
15642 but it is here for anything that does not fit otherwise.
15645 \begin_layout Itemize
15649 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15653 \begin_inset Newline newline
15658 Used to describe stage setting and the action.
15659 First use of speaker names in all CAPs.
15662 \begin_layout Itemize
15666 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15670 \begin_inset Newline newline
15675 Automatically numbered.
15676 On screen it will be arabic,
15677 but will print as Roman.
15680 \begin_layout Itemize
15684 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15688 \begin_inset Newline newline
15698 It is just centered text.
15701 \begin_layout Itemize
15705 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15709 \begin_inset Newline newline
15714 Not automatically numbered.
15715 You supply the number.
15716 This is because I couldn't figure out how.
15719 \begin_layout Itemize
15723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15727 \begin_inset Newline newline
15732 A special case of Narrative to describe the setting and action as the curtain rises.
15735 \begin_layout Itemize
15739 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15743 \begin_inset Newline newline
15748 The speaker's (actor's) title,
15749 centered in all CAPS.
15752 \begin_layout Itemize
15756 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15760 \begin_inset Newline newline
15765 Instructions to the speaker.
15766 The parentheses are automatically inserted.
15767 The ( will appear on screen,
15768 but both will be in the printed play.
15769 This environment is only used within
15776 \begin_layout Itemize
15780 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15784 \begin_inset Newline newline
15789 What the Speaker says.
15792 \begin_layout Itemize
15796 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15800 \begin_inset Newline newline
15805 The curtain comes down.
15808 \begin_layout Itemize
15812 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15818 \begin_layout Itemize
15822 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15828 \begin_layout Itemize
15832 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15838 \begin_layout Standard
15842 \begin_layout Subsection
15843 Hollywood (Hollywood spec scripts)
15846 \begin_layout Standard
15852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15856 \begin_layout Standard
15857 Getting the format of a Hollywood script right is a
15858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15865 It is designed to make the readers focus on content and to be easy and familiar for the actors to read.
15866 Each page of a script should be one minute of film.
15867 Nothing goes in a script that you cannot see or hear on screen.
15868 The courier 12 pt font should be used throughout.
15872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15876 \begin_layout Standard
15877 Speakers' lines should NEVER break in mid-sentence.
15878 If a speaker's lines continue over a page break,
15883 title followed by (Cont'd).
15886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15890 \begin_layout Standard
15895 names as labels then cross-reference the label to insert the name.
15896 The cross-reference dialog will show the current cast of characters.
15897 You can use this to insert the speaker name in narratives also.
15900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15901 Paper size and Margins
15904 \begin_layout Standard
15912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15916 \begin_layout Standard
15917 The following environments are available.
15918 You can use hollywood.bind to get the bind keys shown at the right.
15921 \begin_layout Itemize
15925 \begin_inset Newline newline
15930 Used where nothing else works.
15934 \begin_layout Itemize
15940 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15948 \begin_inset Newline newline
15951 Usually followed by something like
15952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15955 on Sally waking up.
15956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15962 \begin_layout Itemize
15966 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15970 \begin_inset Newline newline
15975 Introduces a new INTERIOR camera set-up.
15976 Always followed by DAY or NIGHT,
15977 or something similar to define the lighting required.
15978 Everthing on this line in CAPS.
15981 \begin_layout Itemize
15985 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15989 \begin_inset Newline newline
15994 Introduces a new EXTERIOR camera set-up.
15995 Everthing on this line in CAPS.
15998 \begin_layout Itemize
16002 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16006 \begin_inset Newline newline
16011 The character speaking.
16014 \begin_layout Itemize
16018 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16022 \begin_inset Newline newline
16027 Instructions to the speaker.
16028 The () are automatically inserted.
16031 \begin_layout Itemize
16035 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16039 \begin_inset Newline newline
16051 \begin_layout Itemize
16055 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16059 \begin_inset Newline newline
16064 Camera movement instruction.
16066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16070 \begin_inset space \space{}
16076 \begin_layout Itemize
16080 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16086 \begin_layout Itemize
16090 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16096 \begin_layout Itemize
16100 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16106 \begin_layout Itemize
16110 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16120 \begin_layout Itemize
16125 \begin_layout Itemize
16130 \begin_layout Itemize
16132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16140 \begin_layout Itemize
16146 \begin_layout Itemize
16151 \begin_layout Itemize
16156 \begin_layout Chapter
16158 \change_inserted 564990737 1671185876
16162 \begin_layout Section
16164 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16165 Academic Field Specifics
16168 \begin_layout Subsection
16170 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16172 Hazard and Precautionary Statements
16175 \begin_layout Standard
16177 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16178 This module provides two insets to typeset numbers and phrases of chemical hazard and precautionary statements.
16179 For a description see
16181 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16182 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16183 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16184 Hazard and Precautionary Statements
16188 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16189 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16190 Hazard and Precautionary Statements
16195 \begin_layout Subsection
16197 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16201 Risk and Safety Statements
16204 \begin_layout Standard
16206 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16207 This module provides two insets,
16217 accessible via the menu
16222 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16224 \begin_inset space ~
16229 and an environment to typeset numbers and phrases of chemical risk and safety statements.
16232 \begin_layout Subsection
16234 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16238 \begin_layout Standard
16240 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
16241 This module uses the
16245 package to add environments useful for linguistics (numbered examples,
16249 You can obtain information about this module in
16254 elp\SpecialChar menuseparator
16260 \begin_inset space ~
16263 Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16272 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16273 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16274 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16280 \begin_layout Section
16282 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16286 \begin_layout Subsection
16288 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16292 \begin_layout Standard
16294 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16295 This module supports the Braille writing system.
16296 It requires the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16302 This and its documentation can be obtained from
16303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16306 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/braille"
16312 You do not have to reconfigure your system after installing it.
16318 elp\SpecialChar menuseparator
16324 \begin_inset space ~
16327 Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16336 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16337 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16338 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16344 \begin_layout Section
16346 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16347 Annotation & Revision
16350 \begin_layout Subsection
16352 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16356 \begin_layout Standard
16358 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16359 This module provides “FiXme” (marginal) annotations for document revision purposes.
16360 A list of annotations can be produced by using the “List of FIXMEs” paragraph style.
16361 The annotations are customizable via the LaTeX preamble.
16362 See the FiXme documentation which can be obtained from
16363 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16366 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fixme/fixme.pdf"
16375 \begin_layout Paragraph
16377 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16381 \begin_layout Standard
16383 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16385 the notes are only displayed in “draft” mode (if the option “draft” has been inserted in
16387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16388 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16389 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
16390 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
16394 To display them always,
16403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16404 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16412 \begin_layout Subsection
16414 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16418 \begin_layout Standard
16420 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16421 This module provides various kinds of annotations for PDF output.
16424 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16425 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16426 PDF comments and File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16427 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16428 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16434 \begin_layout Subsection
16436 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16442 \begin_layout Standard
16444 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16445 This module provides fields and buttons for PDF forms.
16447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16449 name "hyperref documentation"
16450 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref-doc.pdf"
16458 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16459 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16460 PDF forms and File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16461 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16462 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16468 \begin_layout Subsection
16470 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16476 \begin_layout Standard
16478 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16479 This module defines an inset to typeset reading aids (ruby,
16480 furigana) to Chinese characters.
16481 It uses the “okumakro,” “luatexja-ruby” or “ruby” package (depending on the TeX engine) or a fallback definition.
16485 \begin_layout Subsection
16487 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16493 \begin_layout Standard
16495 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16496 This module provides custom insets to insert TODO items in your document.
16497 In order to generate a “List of TODOs,” the module provides a paragraph style.
16498 Inserting “final” in
16500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16501 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16502 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
16503 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
16506 ) suppresses the output of TODO notes.
16508 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16510 name "todonotes documentation"
16511 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/todonotes/todonotes.pdf"
16519 \begin_layout Section
16521 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16525 \begin_layout Subsection
16527 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16528 APA Style with NatBib
16531 \begin_layout Standard
16533 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16534 This module adds support for using natbib together with apacite (the bibliography style need not be apacite —
16535 it could be apacite,
16537 or any bibliography that works with both the natbib and apacite packages.)
16540 \begin_layout Section
16542 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16546 \begin_layout Subsection
16548 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16549 Fancy Colored Boxes
16552 \begin_layout Standard
16554 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16555 This module adds ten custom insets that support colored boxes via the tcolorbox package.
16558 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16559 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16565 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16566 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16567 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16573 name "tcolorbox documentation"
16574 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tcolorbox/tcolorbox.pdf"
16583 \begin_layout Subsection
16585 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16589 \begin_layout Standard
16591 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16592 This provides the custom insets
16610 to scale and rotate its content.
16613 \begin_layout Standard
16615 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16620 is a simple way of reversing text without any other enhancement:
16623 \begin_layout Standard
16625 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16626 \begin_inset Flex Reflectbox
16629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16631 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16632 Great Western Railway
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16644 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16645 (You will need to use Ctrl-R to see any of these examples.)
16648 \begin_layout Standard
16650 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16655 allows you to specify the dimensions of the text or image;
16656 permissible units are em,
16678 it scales by the width factor:
16681 \begin_layout Standard
16683 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16684 \begin_inset Flex Resizebox
16687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16689 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16690 \begin_inset Argument 1
16693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16695 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16704 \begin_inset Argument 2
16707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16709 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16717 Great Western Railway
16727 \begin_layout Standard
16729 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16734 allows you to rotate text around the reference point of the box.
16735 If you wish to rotate the box around a different origin,
16736 place the cursor inside the box and select Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16766 or meaningful combinations of these and the counterclockwise rotation angle is expressed in degrees.
16770 \begin_layout Standard
16772 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16773 \begin_inset Flex Rotatebox
16776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16778 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16779 \begin_inset Argument 1
16782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16784 \change_inserted 274215730 1672888693
16786 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16795 \begin_inset Argument 2
16798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16808 Great Western Railway
16818 \begin_layout Standard
16820 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16821 You can combine boxes as in:
16824 \begin_layout Standard
16826 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16827 \begin_inset Flex Rotatebox
16830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16832 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16833 \begin_inset Argument 1
16836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16838 \change_inserted 274215730 1672888702
16840 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16849 \begin_inset Argument 2
16852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16854 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16863 \begin_inset Flex Resizebox
16866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16868 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16869 \begin_inset Argument 1
16872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16874 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16883 \begin_inset Argument 2
16886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16888 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16897 \begin_inset Flex Reflectbox
16900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16902 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16903 Great Western Railway
16927 \begin_layout Standard
16929 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16935 select Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16936 V-Factor to add a vertical factor.
16937 If the vertical factor is omitted,
16938 the horizontal is used.
16939 Adding different horizontal and vertical values creates distortion as in
16942 \begin_layout Standard
16944 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16947 \begin_inset Flex Scalebox
16950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16952 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16953 \begin_inset Argument 1
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16967 \begin_inset Argument 2
16970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16972 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16982 Great Western Railway
16992 \begin_layout Standard
16994 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16995 A negative horizontal value reverses the text and a negative vertical value inverts it so that you get
16998 \begin_layout Standard
17000 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17001 \begin_inset Flex Scalebox
17004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17007 \begin_inset Argument 1
17010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17012 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17021 \begin_inset Argument 2
17024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17026 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17034 Great Western Railway
17042 \begin_inset Flex Scalebox
17045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17047 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17048 \begin_inset Argument 1
17051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17053 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17062 \begin_inset Argument 2
17065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17067 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
17075 Great Western Railway
17085 \begin_layout Subsection
17087 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17091 \begin_layout Standard
17093 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17094 This module defines Boxes with section header.
17095 It is mainly intended for the SciPoster Document class.
17099 \begin_layout Subsection
17101 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17102 Variable-width Minipages
17105 \begin_layout Standard
17107 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17130 package provides a variable-width minipage,
17131 whose resulting width is the width of its contents (if this does not exceed the specified maximum width).
17132 The inset has two optional arguments which can be added by placing the cursor inside the minipage and entering
17134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17163 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17164 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
17165 Variable-width Minipages
17171 \begin_layout Section
17173 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17177 \begin_layout Subsection
17179 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17180 Fix Computer Modern Fonts
17183 \begin_layout Standard
17185 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17186 This module uses the
17190 package to improve the appearance of Computer Modern fonts and make them available with arbitrary sizes.
17192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17194 name "fix-cm documentation"
17195 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf"
17204 \begin_layout Subsection
17206 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17208 Kernel Fixes (Obsolete)
17211 \begin_layout Standard
17213 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17214 This module loads the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17219 which contains some bug fixes for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17221 If you use this module your typeset document may look different when you process it,
17222 depending on the respective version of
17230 \begin_layout Paragraph
17232 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17238 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17239 recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
17240 kernels (as of 2015/01/01) include the functionality of
17249 module is obsolete with newer \SpecialChar LaTeX
17254 \begin_layout Subsection
17256 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17257 Minimalistic Insets
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17262 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17263 This module redefines several insets (Index,
17265 URL) as being Minimalistic.
17268 \begin_layout Subsection
17270 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17271 Title and Preamble Hacks
17274 \begin_layout Standard
17276 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17277 This module provides two new paragraph styles:
17281 \begin_layout Enumerate
17283 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17288 which puts whatever is entered into it into the preamble.
17291 to include preamble code in the body of a LyX document.
17295 \begin_layout Enumerate
17297 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
17302 which that will put its contents into the body of the LaTeX document,
17310 This is useful for making branches and notes in title-related material.
17312 if you put these in a Standard layout,
17313 this signals to LyX to output
17320 which may then come too early.)
17323 \begin_layout Section
17325 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17329 \begin_layout Subsection
17331 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17335 \begin_layout Standard
17337 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17338 This module uses the
17342 package for algorithm floats rather than LyX’s home-brewed algorithm floats.
17343 Use the Algorithm paragraph style to enter and indent the algorithm.
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17347 name "algorithm2e documentation"
17348 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/algorithm2e/doc/algorithm2e.pdf"
17356 \begin_layout Subsection
17358 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17359 Bilingual Captions AKA Multilingual Captions
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17364 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17365 This module provides the paragraph style
17368 \begin_inset space ~
17373 with which to typeset multilingual captions.
17374 Within this paragraph style
17376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17379 allows you to enter the desired language using one of the babel names.
17382 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17383 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
17384 Multilingual Captions
17388 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17389 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
17390 Multilingual Captions
17392 further information on its use.
17395 \begin_layout Subsection
17397 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17398 Number Figures by Section
17401 \begin_layout Standard
17403 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17404 This module resets the figure number at section start and prepends the section number to the figure number,
17405 as in “Figure 2.1.” (By default book and report document classes number by Chapter and article document classes have a single sequence.)
17408 \begin_layout Subsection
17410 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17411 Number Tables by Section
17414 \begin_layout Standard
17416 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17417 This module resets the table number at section start and prepends the section number to the table number,
17418 as in “Table 2.1.” (By default book and report document classes number by Chapter and article document classes have a single sequence.)
17421 \begin_layout Section
17423 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17427 \begin_layout Subsection
17429 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17433 \begin_layout Standard
17435 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17436 This module adds an endnote inset,
17437 in addition to footnotes.
17443 which has some limitations but works with older LaTeX distributions as well.
17446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17447 Custom Inset\SpecialChar menuseparator
17450 to insert an endnote and
17452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17453 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17456 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17459 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17460 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17461 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17468 \begin_layout Subsection
17470 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17471 Endnotes (Extended)
17474 \begin_layout Standard
17476 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17477 This module adds an endnote inset,
17478 in addition to footnotes.
17483 package which is more powerful and customizable than the
17488 but requires a fairly modern LaTeX distribution (with LaTeX3).
17491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17492 Custom Inset\SpecialChar menuseparator
17495 to insert an endnote and
17497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17498 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17501 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17504 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17505 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17506 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17507 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17513 \begin_layout Subsection
17515 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17516 Footnotes as Endnotes (Basic)
17519 \begin_layout Standard
17521 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17522 This module sets all footnotes as endnotes.
17528 which has some limitations but works with older LaTeX distributions as well.
17531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17532 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17535 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17538 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17539 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17540 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17541 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17547 \begin_layout Subsection
17549 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17550 Footnotes as Endnotes (Extended)
17553 \begin_layout Standard
17555 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17556 This module sets all footnotes as endnotes.
17561 package which is more powerful and customizable than then
17566 but requires a fairly modern LaTeX distribution (with LaTeX3).
17569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17570 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17573 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17576 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17577 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17578 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17579 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17585 \begin_layout Section
17587 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17592 \begin_layout Subsection
17594 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17598 \begin_layout Standard
17600 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17601 This module provides support for the
17605 package to print chess games.
17608 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17609 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
17610 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
17613 where you will find
17622 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17624 name "chessboard documentation"
17625 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/chessboard/chessboard.pdf"
17633 \begin_layout Subsection
17635 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17636 Lilypond Music Notation
17639 \begin_layout Standard
17641 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17642 This module provides an inset via
17647 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17648 Custom Inset\SpecialChar menuseparator
17651 in which to enter code for the LilyPond music editor.
17652 It will then be processed in the output.
17655 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17656 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
17661 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17662 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
17663 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
17667 It cannot be used if the modules
17670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17678 \begin_layout Section
17680 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17684 \begin_layout Subsection
17686 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17690 name "subsec:Customizable-Lists"
17697 \begin_layout Standard
17699 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17700 This module uses the
17704 package to enable the customization of various list environments.
17707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17709 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17710 Custom Enumerate Lists
17713 \begin_layout Standard
17716 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17717 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
17722 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
17730 There you add the command
17733 \begin_layout Standard
17735 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17743 \begin_layout Standard
17745 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17746 in \SpecialChar TeX
17756 \begin_layout Standard
17758 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17763 is the first level counter of the enumeration.
17764 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
17769 ” in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (
17791 \begin_layout Standard
17793 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17800 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
17801 For capital Roman numerals replace
17813 in the command above.
17814 For Arabic numerals use
17822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17829 items with capital or small Latin letters use
17845 \begin_layout Standard
17848 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17849 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17854 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17860 You can only number 26
17861 \begin_inset space ~
17864 items with Latin letters,
17865 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
17873 \begin_layout Standard
17875 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17876 Here is a list with custom numbering:
17879 \begin_layout Enumerate
17881 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17882 \begin_inset Argument 1
17885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17887 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17893 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17914 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17921 \begin_layout Enumerate
17923 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17924 \begin_inset Argument 1
17927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17935 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17956 \begin_layout Enumerate
17958 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17960 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17967 \begin_layout Enumerate
17969 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17970 \begin_inset Argument 1
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17975 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17981 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17984 \change_deleted 274215730 1672889016
17988 \change_inserted 274215730 1672889016
17992 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18008 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
18015 \begin_layout Enumerate
18017 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18018 \begin_inset Argument 1
18021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18023 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18029 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18053 \begin_layout Standard
18055 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18056 For this list these commands were used:
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18062 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18072 \begin_inset Newline newline
18080 \begin_inset Newline newline
18084 \change_deleted 274215730 1672889037
18088 \change_inserted 274215730 1672889037
18092 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18096 \begin_inset Newline newline
18106 \begin_layout Standard
18108 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18115 makes the label emphasized and
18116 \change_deleted 274215730 1672889045
18122 \change_inserted 274215730 1672889046
18126 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18132 \begin_layout Standard
18134 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18140 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18146 When you change the label of a list level,
18147 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
18155 \begin_layout Standard
18157 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18163 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18183 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18184 Numbered Paragraphs in Reports
18187 \begin_layout Enumerate
18189 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138213
18190 Official reports often include numbered paragraphs;
18191 you can achieve this with a variation on the approach outlined in the footnote
18192 \begin_inset space ~
18196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18198 reference "fn:If-you-really"
18211 in each command with
18218 \begin_layout Enumerate
18220 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18221 These numbered paragraphs were generated by inserting the \SpecialChar TeX
18223 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
18230 \begin_layout Standard
18232 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18246 \begin_layout Standard
18248 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18249 before the start of the section;
18256 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18257 section counter to generate the first part of the number.
18261 \begin_layout Enumerate
18263 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18264 I have ignored the subsection heading in this example because,
18265 with paragraphs numbered in this way,
18266 subsections are less likely to be used.
18269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18271 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18272 Resumed Enumeration
18275 \begin_layout Standard
18277 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18283 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18299 \begin_layout Standard
18301 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18302 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
18305 \begin_layout Enumerate
18307 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18308 \begin_inset Argument 1
18311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18319 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18336 \begin_inset Note Note
18339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18341 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18342 goes back to default numbering
18350 \begin_layout Enumerate
18352 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18356 \begin_layout Standard
18358 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18362 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
18364 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18368 \begin_layout Standard
18370 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18371 To resume an enumeration,
18377 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
18378 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
18383 \begin_layout Standard
18385 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18386 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18397 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
18398 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18407 \begin_layout Standard
18409 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18410 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
18411 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
18412 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
18417 \begin_layout Standard
18419 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18425 \begin_layout Standard
18427 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18432 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
18436 \begin_layout Enumerate
18438 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18442 \begin_layout Enumerate
18444 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18448 \begin_layout Standard
18450 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18451 Enumeration starting at a given value:
18454 \begin_layout Enumerate
18456 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18457 \begin_inset Argument 1
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18462 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18468 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18482 This enumeration starts at 4
18485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18487 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18489 \begin_inset Index idx
18494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18508 \begin_layout Standard
18510 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18511 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
18512 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
18515 \begin_layout Itemize
18517 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18521 \begin_layout Itemize
18523 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18524 with standard spacing
18527 \begin_layout Standard
18529 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18530 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
18531 Add there the command
18535 to get no additional list space like in this example:
18538 \begin_layout Itemize
18540 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18541 \begin_inset Argument 1
18544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18546 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18552 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18569 \begin_layout Itemize
18571 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18575 \begin_layout Itemize
18577 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18581 \begin_layout Standard
18583 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18584 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the
18589 \begin_inset Index idx
18594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18607 For more information see the
18608 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18610 name "enumitem documentation"
18611 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
18619 \begin_layout Standard
18621 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18622 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
18623 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
18624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18627 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
18630 \begin_layout Enumerate
18632 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18633 \begin_inset Argument 1
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18638 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18644 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18664 \begin_layout Enumerate
18666 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18667 with negative indentation
18670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18672 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18673 Further Customization
18674 \begin_inset Index idx
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18681 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18693 \begin_layout Standard
18695 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18696 You can also change the style of description lists.
18700 \begin_layout Standard
18702 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18708 \begin_layout Standard
18710 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18711 changes the description label font,
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18717 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18726 \begin_layout Standard
18728 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18729 sets the list style.
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18734 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18735 An example where the command
18738 \begin_layout Standard
18740 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18749 \begin_layout Standard
18751 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18755 \begin_layout Description
18757 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18759 \begin_inset space ~
18764 \begin_inset Argument 1
18767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18769 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18775 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18794 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
18795 therefore ionizing them.
18798 \begin_layout Description
18800 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18802 \begin_inset space ~
18806 In computer science,
18807 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
18809 or handles to a resource such as an object,
18811 disk space or other resource.
18814 \begin_layout Standard
18816 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18817 There are many more commands and features provided by the
18822 \begin_inset Index idx
18827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18840 For more information see the
18841 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18843 name "enumitem documentation"
18844 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
18852 \begin_layout Subsection
18854 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18860 \begin_layout Standard
18862 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18863 This module uses the package
18867 to provide nine new list environments.
18868 Itemized and enumerated lists can be typeset within paragraphs,
18869 as paragraphs and in a compact version.
18870 Most environments have optional arguments to format the labels.
18872 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18873 list environments itemize and enumerate are extended to use a similar optional argument.
18874 For further details see
18876 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18877 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18878 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18879 Paragraph Lists (paralist)
18884 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
18885 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
18889 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18891 name "paralist documentation"
18892 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/paralist/paralist.pdf"
18900 \begin_layout Section
18902 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18903 Literate Programming
18906 \begin_layout Subsection
18908 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18912 \begin_layout Standard
18914 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18915 This module allows the use of Noweb as a literate programming tool.
18916 The files and the documentation for Noweb can be obtained from
18917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18920 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/noweb"
18926 Literate programming is described in section
18927 \begin_inset space ~
18931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18933 reference "sec:Literate-Programming"
18938 and there are three example files:
18941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18942 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18943 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18949 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18950 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18951 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18956 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18957 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18958 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18959 Noweb2\SpecialChar LyX
18965 \begin_layout Subsection
18967 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18971 \begin_layout Standard
18973 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18974 This module uses the
18984 \begin_inset Flex Code
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18997 package in R for dynamic report generation has to be installed for this module to work:
18999 \begin_inset Flex Code
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19005 install.packages(“knitr”)
19016 \begin_layout Paragraph
19018 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19022 \begin_layout Standard
19024 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19025 it depends on R >= 2.14.1.
19027 \begin_inset Flex URL
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19032 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19034 http://yihui.name/knitr
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19047 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19052 also has to be installed.
19053 It cannot be used if the modules
19056 \begin_inset space ~
19068 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
19069 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
19075 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19076 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
19077 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
19081 \begin_inset space ~
19085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19087 reference "sec:Literate-Programming"
19092 for information about literate programming.
19095 \begin_layout Subsection
19097 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19101 \begin_layout Standard
19103 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
19104 This module allows the use of the statistical language S/R as a literate programming tool.
19115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19118 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/includernw"
19124 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19127 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/fancyvrb"
19132 are available from CTAN.
19133 It cannot be used if the module
19136 \begin_inset space ~
19144 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
19145 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
19151 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19152 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
19153 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
19157 \begin_inset space ~
19161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19163 reference "sec:Literate-Programming"
19168 for information about literate programming.
19171 \begin_layout Section
19173 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19177 \begin_layout Subsection
19179 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19183 \begin_layout Standard
19185 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19186 This modules defines theorem environments and the proof environment using the extended AMS machinery.
19187 Both numbered and unnumbered types are provided.
19189 the theorems are numbered consecutively throughout the document.
19190 This can be changed by loading one of the
19192 AMS Theorems (Numbered by \SpecialChar ldots
19196 It cannot be used if the modules
19202 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19207 \begin_layout Subsection
19209 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19210 AMS Theorems (Extended)
19213 \begin_layout Standard
19215 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19216 This module defines some additional theorem environments for use with the
19220 package (which must be loaded).
19221 It includes Criterion,
19232 Case and Question in both numbered and unnumbered forms.
19235 \begin_layout Subsection
19237 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19238 AMS Theorems (Extended,
19239 Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19242 \begin_layout Standard
19244 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19245 This module defines some additional theorem environments for use with the
19247 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19249 package (which must be loaded).
19250 It includes Criterion,
19259 Assumption and Case in both numbered and unnumbered forms.
19262 AMS Theorems (Extended)
19265 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter,
19266 restarted with each new chapter (e.g.,
19273 axiom 2.1\SpecialChar ldots
19275 as opposed to criterion 1,
19281 \begin_layout Subsection
19283 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19284 AMS Theorems (Extended,
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19290 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19291 This module defines some additional theorem environments for use with the
19293 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19295 package (which must be loaded).
19296 It includes Criterion,
19305 Assumption and Case in both numbered and unnumbered forms.
19308 AMS Theorems (Extended)
19311 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19319 as opposed to criterion 1,
19327 \begin_layout Subsection
19329 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19330 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19333 \begin_layout Standard
19335 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19336 This module defines theorem environments and the proof environment using the extended AMS machinery.
19337 Both numbered and unnumbered types are provided.
19343 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19352 as opposed to theorem 1,
19358 The numbering restarts for each chapter:
19362 It cannot be used if the modules
19374 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19378 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19383 \begin_layout Subsection
19385 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19386 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19389 \begin_layout Standard
19391 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19392 This module defines theorem environments and the proof environment using the extended AMS machinery.
19393 Both numbered and unnumbered types are provided.
19399 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19408 as opposed to theorem 1,
19414 The numbering’s scope is the whole document.
19415 For chapter- and section-wide numbering,
19416 use one of the ‘within Sections’/‘within Chapters’ modules,
19418 It cannot be used if the modules
19430 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19434 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19439 \begin_layout Subsection
19441 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19442 Number Equations by Section
19445 \begin_layout Standard
19447 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19448 This module resets the equation number at section start and prepends the section number to the equation number,
19452 \begin_layout Subsection
19454 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19458 \begin_layout Standard
19460 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19461 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19463 the theorems are numbered consecutively throughout the document.
19464 This can be changed by loading one of the
19466 Standard Theorems (Numbered by \SpecialChar ldots
19470 It cannot be used if the modules
19476 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19482 \begin_layout Subsection
19484 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19485 Standard Theorems (Nameable)
19488 \begin_layout Standard
19490 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19491 This module facilitates the use of named theorems.
19492 The name of the theorem goes into the “Additional Theorem Text” argument.
19496 \begin_layout Subsection
19498 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19499 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapter)
19502 \begin_layout Standard
19504 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19505 This module numbers theorems and the like by chapter (i.e.,
19506 the counter is reset at each chapter start).
19507 Use this module only with document classes that provide a chapter environment.
19517 It cannot be used if the module
19519 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Section)
19524 \begin_layout Subsection
19526 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19527 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Section)
19530 \begin_layout Standard
19532 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19533 This module numbers theorems and the like by section (i.e.,
19534 the counter is reset at each section start).
19544 It cannot be used if the module
19546 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapter)
19551 \begin_layout Subsection
19553 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19554 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19557 \begin_layout Standard
19559 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19560 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19570 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19579 as opposed to theorem 1,
19585 The numbering is reset at each chapter start.
19588 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19592 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19595 It cannot be used if any of the modules
19607 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19612 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Sections)
19616 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Sections)
19621 \begin_layout Subsection
19623 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19624 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Sections)
19627 \begin_layout Standard
19629 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19630 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19640 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19649 as opposed to theorem 1,
19655 The numbering is reset at each section start.
19658 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19662 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19665 It cannot be used if any of the modules
19677 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19682 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapters)
19686 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19691 \begin_layout Subsection
19693 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19694 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19697 \begin_layout Standard
19699 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19700 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19710 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19719 as opposed to theorem 1,
19725 The numbering’s scope is the whole document.
19726 For chapter- and section-wide numbering,
19727 use one of the “within Chapters”/“within Sections” modules,
19729 It cannot be used if any of the modules
19741 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19745 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19750 \begin_layout Subsection
19752 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19753 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19756 \begin_layout Standard
19758 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19759 This module defines only unnumbered theorem environments and the proof environment,
19760 using the extended AMS machinery.
19761 It cannot be used if either of the modules
19772 \begin_layout Subsection
19774 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19778 \begin_layout Standard
19780 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19781 This module provides a straightforward way to segregate subequations in LyX.
19784 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
19785 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
19792 \begin_layout Section
19794 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19798 \begin_layout Subsection
19800 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19801 Custom Header/Footer Text
19804 \begin_layout Standard
19806 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19807 This module requires the
19810 \begin_inset space ~
19824 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
19829 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19831 \begin_inset space ~
19836 dialog to be set to
19841 It adds six environments to document classes which support the
19848 \begin_layout Itemize
19850 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19856 \begin_layout Itemize
19858 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19864 \begin_layout Itemize
19866 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19872 \begin_layout Itemize
19874 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19880 \begin_layout Itemize
19882 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19888 \begin_layout Itemize
19890 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19896 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19898 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19899 Fancy Headers and Footers
19902 \begin_layout Standard
19904 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19905 The default page layout is rather plain;
19907 \begin_inset Flex Code
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19921 all you get is a centered page number at the bottom of the page.
19922 This document uses KOMA-script’s book class;
19923 so it appears to be a bit fancier.
19927 \begin_inset space ~
19941 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
19946 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19958 you will find that the page header is divided into three fields,
19959 not surprisingly labeled
19960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19986 The footer is also divided into these three fields.
19987 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
19988 commands to set these fields in the simplest manner are
20017 Suppose you wish to put your name in the upper left hand corner of each page.
20018 Simply insert the following command in the preamble:
20022 \begin_layout Standard
20024 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20040 \begin_layout Standard
20042 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20043 You will now see your name in the upper left.
20044 If a field has a default entry that you would like to get rid of (often the page number appears in the central footer) simply include a command with a blank argument,
20046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20052 \begin_layout Standard
20054 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20062 \begin_layout Standard
20064 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20067 an easier way to make simple changes.
20073 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
20078 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20079 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
20080 Page Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
20081 Custom Header/Footer Text
20084 you will find you have six new environments corresponding to the six fields described above.
20087 \begin_layout Standard
20089 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20090 Let's get really fancy:
20091 lets put the section number with the word
20092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20104 \begin_inset space \space{}
20107 Section 3) in the upper left,
20108 the page number (e.
20109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20113 \begin_inset space \space{}
20116 Page 4) in the upper right,
20117 your name in the lower left,
20118 and the date in the lower right.
20119 Use your newly enabled environments to add these entries:
20122 \begin_layout Standard
20124 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20125 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20131 \begin_layout Standard
20133 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20137 \begin_inset space ~
20155 \begin_layout Standard
20157 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20163 \begin_layout Standard
20165 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20180 \begin_layout Standard
20182 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20192 \begin_layout Standard
20194 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20200 \begin_layout Standard
20202 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20217 \begin_layout Standard
20219 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20220 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20226 \begin_layout Standard
20228 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20229 Make sure you enter the commands
20248 as \SpecialChar TeX
20266 access \SpecialChar LaTeX
20267 ’s section and page counters,
20268 and so print out the current section and page numbers.
20275 simply prints out today’s date.
20278 \begin_layout Standard
20280 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20281 The thicknesses of the horizontal rules drawn beneath the header and above the footer can also be modified.
20282 If you don't want one of the rules,
20283 set its thickness to 0.
20284 The header rule has a default thickness of 0.4pt,
20285 the footer rule is 0pt.
20286 For this you will need to use \SpecialChar TeX
20290 \begin_layout Standard
20292 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20299 headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
20304 \begin_layout Standard
20306 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20313 footrulewidth}{0.4pt}
20315 to set the thicknesses.
20318 \begin_layout Standard
20320 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20321 You can switch the header/footer settings on and off for individual pages using \SpecialChar TeX
20326 thispagestyle{empty}
20333 thispagestyle{plain}
20340 thispagestyle{fancy}
20343 Simply insert them in the text on the page you want changed and mark them as \SpecialChar TeX
20346 title pages are marked as plain by default,
20347 while following pages are marked fancy when using the global fancy setting.
20351 \begin_layout Standard
20353 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20354 If you want a header or footer to be on the outer side of a two sided document,
20355 you need to use something like:
20358 \begin_layout Standard
20360 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20363 \begin_inset Flex Strong
20366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20384 \begin_layout Standard
20386 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20389 \begin_inset Flex Strong
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20412 \begin_layout Standard
20414 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20415 The first command clears all existing footers avoiding any conflicts with your new command.
20418 \begin_layout Standard
20420 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20421 You can enter any of these commands,
20422 the simpler ones in any of your new environments,
20423 the more complex ones as \SpecialChar TeX
20425 at any point in your document and they will take effect on the next page.
20428 \begin_layout Standard
20430 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20431 As a final example,
20432 it is possible to include an image in the header or footer.
20433 Suppose you want to put a company logo in the upper left hand corner.
20434 You might try something like
20437 \begin_layout Standard
20439 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20448 includegraphics{logo.eps}}}
20451 \begin_layout Standard
20454 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20455 (you may need to preface this with
20459 usepackage{graphics}
20461 if you don't include graphics elsewhere in your document).
20464 \begin_layout Standard
20466 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20467 For more information on fancy headers,
20469 \begin_inset Flex Code
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
20486 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fancyhdr"
20495 \begin_layout Subsection
20497 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20498 Landscape Document Parts
20501 \begin_layout Standard
20503 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20504 This module outputs parts of the document in landscape mode using
20506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20507 Custom Insets\SpecialChar menuseparator
20512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20513 Custom Insets\SpecialChar menuseparator
20514 Landscape (Floating)
20519 \begin_layout Subsection
20521 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20524 name "sec:Multiple-Columns"
20531 \begin_layout Standard
20533 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20534 This module uses the
20539 \begin_inset Index idx
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20556 package and is independent of the option
20569 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
20574 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20576 \begin_inset space ~
20582 If you want to have two columns for the whole document,
20583 you are recommended to use the
20592 For all other cases use this module.
20593 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236008
20594 Multiple Text Columns
20597 \begin_layout Standard
20599 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236008
20600 This feature is independent of the option
20602 Two-column document
20604 in the document settings under
20609 If you want to have 2
20610 \begin_inset space ~
20613 columns for the whole document,
20614 it is recommended to use the
20616 Two-column document
20619 For all other cases use this feature.
20622 \begin_layout Standard
20624 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236008
20625 To use multiple text columns in your document,
20626 you have to load the module
20632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20633 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20636 ) and must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20638 \begin_inset Flex Code
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 \begin_layout Standard
20653 Footnotes within multiple columns will be placed at the bottom of the page and not under each column.
20654 Within the different columns you can use everything,
20655 with the limitation that for floats you need to
20656 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236179
20657 use the float option
20660 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236179
20669 \begin_inset space ~
20679 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
20685 \begin_inset space ~
20695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20699 \begin_layout Standard
20700 If you want to have 2
20701 \begin_inset space ~
20704 columns in your text,
20705 insert a multicolumn inset via the menu
20707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20709 \begin_inset space ~
20712 Insets\SpecialChar menuseparator
20714 \begin_inset space ~
20719 where the columns should start.
20720 Write all text that should be printed in 2
20721 \begin_inset space ~
20724 columns into this inset.
20727 \begin_layout Standard
20728 Here is an example:
20731 \begin_layout Standard
20733 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 The Adventure of the Empty House
20744 \begin_inset Newline newline
20747 by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 It was in the spring of the year 1894 that all London was interested,
20754 and the fashionable world dismayed,
20755 by the murder of the Honourable Ronald Adair under most unusual and inexplicable circumstances.
20756 The public has already learned those particulars of the crime which came out in the police investigation,
20757 but a good deal was suppressed upon that occasion,
20758 since the case for the prosecution was so overwhelmingly strong that it was not necessary to bring forward all the facts.
20760 at the end of nearly ten years,
20761 am I allowed to supply those missing links which make up the whole of that remarkable chain.
20762 The crime was of interest in itself,
20763 but that interest was as nothing to me compared to the inconceivable sequel,
20764 which afforded me the greatest shock and surprise of any event in my adventurous life.
20766 after this long interval,
20767 I find myself thrilling as I think of it,
20768 and feeling once more that sudden flood of joy,
20770 and incredulity which utterly submerged my mind.
20771 Let me say to that public,
20772 which has shown some interest in those glimpses which I have occasionally given them of the thoughts and actions of a very remarkable man,
20773 that they are not to blame me if I have not shared my knowledge with them,
20774 for I should have considered it my first duty to do so,
20775 had I not been barred by a positive prohibition from his own lips,
20776 which was only withdrawn upon the third of last month.
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20785 To get 3 or more columns,
20786 set the cursor into the multicolumn inset and use the menu
20788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20790 \begin_inset space ~
20794 \begin_inset space ~
20800 The number of the desired columns is written into that inset (for 3
20801 \begin_inset space ~
20805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20813 \begin_inset Newline newline
20816 Here is an example with 3
20817 \begin_inset space ~
20823 \begin_layout Standard
20824 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 \begin_inset Argument 1
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 It can be imagined that my close intimacy with Sherlock Holmes had interested me deeply in crime,
20841 and that after his disappearance I never failed to read with care the various problems which came before the public.
20842 And I even attempted,
20844 for my own private satisfaction,
20845 to employ his methods in their solution,
20846 though with indifferent success.
20849 which appealed to me like this tragedy of Ronald Adair.
20850 As I read the evidence at the inquest,
20851 which led up to a verdict of willful murder against some person or persons unknown,
20852 I realized more clearly than I had ever done the loss which the community had sustained by the death of Sherlock Holmes.
20853 There were points about this strange business which would,
20855 have specially appealed to him,
20856 and the efforts of the police would have been supplemented,
20857 or more probably anticipated,
20858 by the trained observation and the alert mind of the first criminal agent in Europe.
20860 as I drove upon my round,
20861 I turned over the case in my mind and found no explanation which appeared to me to be adequate.
20862 At the risk of telling a twice-told tale,
20863 I will recapitulate the facts as they were known to the public at the conclusion of the inquest.
20871 \begin_layout Standard
20872 You can have up to 10
20873 \begin_inset space ~
20876 columns if you want to,
20877 but that might not be very pleasant for the readers of your document.
20880 \begin_layout Standard
20882 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236245
20883 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
20891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20892 Columns inside Columns
20895 \begin_layout Standard
20896 You can also have columns inside columns:
20899 \begin_layout Standard
20900 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 The Honourable Ronald Adair was the second son of the Earl of Maynooth,
20907 at that time governor of one of the Australian colonies.
20908 Adair's mother had returned from Australia to undergo the operation for cataract,
20911 and her daughter Hilda were living together at 427 Park Lane.
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 The youth moved in the best society
20922 \begin_inset space ~
20926 so far as was known,
20927 no enemies and no particular vices.
20928 He had been engaged to Miss Edith Woodley,
20930 but the engagement had been broken off by mutual consent some months before,
20931 and there was no sign that it had left any very profound feeling behind it.
20932 For the rest {sic} the man's life moved in a narrow and conventional circle,
20933 for his habits were quiet and his nature unemotional.
20934 Yet it was upon this easy-going young aristocrat that death came,
20935 in most strange and unexpected form,
20936 between the hours of ten and eleven-twenty on the night of March 30,
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 Ronald Adair was fond of cards
20949 \begin_inset space ~
20952 – playing continually,
20953 but never for such stakes as would hurt him.
20954 He was a member of the Baldwin,
20956 and the Bagatelle card clubs.
20958 after dinner on the day of his death,
20959 he had played a rubber of whist at the latter club.
20960 He had also played there in the afternoon.
20965 The evidence of those who had played with him
20966 \begin_inset space ~
20973 \begin_inset space ~
20976 – showed that the game was whist,
20977 and that there was a fairly equal fall of the cards.
20978 Adair might have lost five pounds,
20980 His fortune was a considerable one,
20981 and such a loss could not in any way affect him.
20982 He had played nearly every day at one club or other,
20983 but he was a cautious player,
20984 and usually rose a winner.
20985 It came out in evidence that,
20986 in partnership with Colonel Moran,
20987 he had actually won as much as four hundred and twenty pounds in a sitting,
20989 from Godfrey Milner and Lord Balmoral.
20990 So much for his recent history as it came out at the inquest.
20998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21002 \begin_layout Standard
21003 The examples in this section show some more special features of multiple columns.
21006 \begin_layout Standard
21007 For more features of multiple columns,
21009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21011 name "documentation"
21012 target "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf"
21017 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21019 \begin_inset Flex Code
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 \begin_layout Paragraph
21035 \begin_layout Standard
21036 To add a preface text for multiple columns,
21037 set the cursor into the multicolumn inset and use the menu
21039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21043 Write your preface text into that inset.
21044 \begin_inset Newline newline
21047 This is an example with some preface text:
21050 \begin_layout Standard
21051 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21057 \begin_layout Standard
21058 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 \begin_inset Argument 2
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 And the story continues and continues and continues and continues\SpecialChar ldots
21074 On the evening of the crime,
21075 he returned from the club exactly at ten.
21076 His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
21077 The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second floor,
21078 generally used as his sitting-room.
21079 She had lit a fire there,
21080 and as it smoked she had opened the window.
21081 No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty,
21082 the hour of the return of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
21083 Desiring to say good-night,
21084 she attempted to enter her son's room.
21085 The door was locked on the inside,
21086 and no answer could be got to their cries and knocking.
21088 and the door forced.
21089 The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
21090 His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet,
21091 but no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
21099 \begin_layout Standard
21100 You can also use a section heading as the preface if you use a section command as \SpecialChar TeX
21102 For example the command
21105 \begin_layout LyX-Code
21108 subsection{subsection title}
21111 \begin_layout Standard
21112 creates a subsection.
21113 In this example the preface is a subsubsection:
21116 \begin_layout Standard
21117 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 \begin_inset Argument 2
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 This is a subsubsection heading as a preface
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 A minute examination of the circumstances served only to make the case more complex.
21156 In the first place,
21157 no reason could be given why the young man should have fastened the door upon the inside.
21158 There was the possibility that the murderer had done this,
21159 and had afterwards escaped by the window.
21160 The drop was at least twenty feet,
21162 and a bed of crocuses in full bloom lay beneath.
21163 Neither the flowers nor the earth showed any sign of having been disturbed,
21164 nor were there any marks upon the narrow strip of grass which separated the house from the road.
21167 it was the young man himself who had fastened the door.
21168 But how did he come by his death?
21169 No one could have climbed up to the window without leaving traces.
21170 Suppose a man had fired through the window,
21171 he would indeed be a remarkable shot who could with a revolver inflict so deadly a wound.
21173 Park Lane is a frequented thoroughfare;
21174 there is a cab stand within a hundred yards of the house.
21175 No one had heard a shot.
21183 \begin_layout Standard
21184 If there is less vertical space than 6
21185 \begin_inset space ~
21188 text lines is left on the page at the beginning of the multiple columns,
21189 a page break will be inserted before the multiple columns.
21190 Depending on the number of lines of the preface text,
21191 you might want to change this space.
21192 This is done by setting the cursor into the mulitcolumn inset behind the preface (if there is any) and using the menu
21194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21196 \begin_inset space ~
21200 \begin_inset space ~
21204 \begin_inset space ~
21210 Insert into that inset the amount of space like e.
21211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21215 \begin_inset space \space{}
21219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21227 \begin_inset Newline newline
21230 In this example the space is set to 7
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21234 text lines by using
21235 \begin_inset Flex Code
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 \begin_inset Flex Code
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21258 needs to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
21262 \begin_layout Standard
21263 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 \begin_inset Argument 3
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 On the evening of the crime,
21292 he returned from the club exactly at ten.
21293 His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
21294 The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second floor,
21295 generally used as his sitting-room.
21296 She had lit a fire there,
21297 and as it smoked she had opened the window.
21298 No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty,
21299 the hour of the return of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
21300 Desiring to say good-night,
21301 she attempted to enter her son's room.
21302 The door was locked on the inside,
21303 and no answer could be got to their cries and knocking.
21305 and the door forced.
21306 The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
21307 His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet,
21308 but no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
21316 \begin_layout Paragraph
21320 \begin_layout Standard
21321 The amount of space before and after multiple columns can be changed by changing the length
21322 \begin_inset Flex Code
21325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 For example the command
21337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
21345 \begin_layout Standard
21346 in \SpecialChar TeX
21347 Code changes its value to 3
21348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21352 The change must be made before the multiple columns' start.
21353 The predefined value is 13
21354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21360 \begin_layout Standard
21362 \begin_inset Flex Code
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21380 \begin_layout Standard
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 multicolsep}{2.5cm}
21398 \begin_layout Standard
21399 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 All day I turned these facts over in my mind,
21406 endeavouring to hit upon some theory which could reconcile them all,
21407 and to find that line of least resistance which my poor friend had declared to be the starting-point of every investigation.
21408 I confess that I made little progress.
21409 In the evening I strolled across the Park,
21410 and found myself about six o'clock at the Oxford Street end of Park Lane.
21411 A group of loafers upon the pavements,
21412 all staring up at a particular window,
21413 directed me to the house which I had come to see.
21415 thin man with coloured glasses,
21416 whom I strongly suspected of being a plain-clothes detective,
21417 was pointing out some theory of his own,
21418 while the others crowded round to listen to what he said.
21419 I got as near him as I could,
21420 but his observations seemed to me to be absurd,
21421 so I withdrew again in some disgust.
21422 As I did so I struck against an elderly,
21424 who had been behind me,
21425 and I knocked down several books which he was carrying.
21433 \begin_layout Standard
21434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 The values you set with
21444 \begin_inset Flex Code
21447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 will be used for all following multiple columns until you change them again.
21463 \begin_layout Standard
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 \begin_inset Note Note
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 go back to the default
21491 \begin_layout Standard
21493 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236355
21494 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
21502 \begin_layout Paragraph
21506 \begin_layout Standard
21507 A column break can be forced by inserting the command
21508 \begin_inset Flex Code
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 as \SpecialChar TeX
21520 Code to that position in the text where the column should be broken.
21521 Note that this leads in most cases to whitespace in the text.
21522 \begin_inset Newline newline
21525 Here is an example:
21528 \begin_layout Standard
21529 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21538 You're surprised to see me,
21540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 I acknowledged that I was.
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21563 and when I chanced to see you go into this house,
21564 as I came hobbling after you,
21565 I thought to myself,
21566 I'll just step in and see that kind gentleman,
21567 and tell him that if I was a bit gruff in my manner there was not any harm meant,
21568 and that I am much obliged to him for picking up my books.
21569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21581 You make too much of a trifle,
21582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21590 May I ask how you knew who I was?
21591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21594 AFTER THIS SENTENCE THE COLUMN BREAK IS FORCED.
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21618 if it isn't too great a liberty,
21619 I am a neighbour of yours,
21620 for you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street,
21621 and very happy to see you,
21623 Maybe you collect yourself,
21628 \begin_inset space ~
21644 \begin_inset space ~
21649 With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
21653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21664 \begin_layout Paragraph
21668 \begin_layout Standard
21669 The width of the columns is automatically calculated,
21670 but you can modify the space between the columns.
21671 This is done by changing the length
21672 \begin_inset Flex Code
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 Its predefined value is 10
21685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21689 Here is an example where
21690 \begin_inset Flex Code
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21708 \begin_layout Standard
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 \begin_layout Standard
21727 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 My observations of No.
21734 \begin_inset space \space{}
21737 427 Park Lane did little to clear up the problem in which I was interested.
21738 The house was separated from the street by a low wall and railing,
21739 the whole not more than five feet high.
21740 It was perfectly easy,
21742 for anyone to get into the garden,
21743 but the window was entirely inaccessible,
21744 since there was no water pipe or anything which could help the most active man to climb it.
21745 More puzzled than ever,
21746 I retraced my steps to Kensington.
21747 I had not been in my study five minutes when the maid entered to say that a person desired to see me.
21748 To my astonishment it was none other than my strange old book collector,
21750 wizened face peering out from a frame of white hair,
21751 and his precious volumes,
21752 a dozen of them at least,
21753 wedged under his right arm.
21761 \begin_layout Standard
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21777 \begin_inset Note Note
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 go back to the default
21789 \begin_layout Paragraph
21793 \begin_layout Standard
21794 Between the columns a rule with a width of the length
21795 \begin_inset Flex Code
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 If this rule width is set to 0
21808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21811 pt (this is the default),
21812 the rule is suppressed.
21813 In the following example the rule is 2
21814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21820 \begin_layout Standard
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 columnseprule}{2pt}
21838 \begin_layout Standard
21839 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21848 You're surprised to see me,
21850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 I acknowledged that I was.
21864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21873 and when I chanced to see you go into this house,
21874 as I came hobbling after you,
21875 I thought to myself,
21876 I'll just step in and see that kind gentleman,
21877 and tell him that if I was a bit gruff in my manner there was not any harm meant,
21878 and that I am much obliged to him for picking up my books.
21879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21891 You make too much of a trifle,
21892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21900 May I ask how you knew who I was?
21901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21915 if it isn't too great a liberty,
21916 I am a neighbour of yours,
21917 for you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street,
21918 and very happy to see you,
21920 Maybe you collect yourself,
21925 \begin_inset space ~
21941 \begin_inset space ~
21946 With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
21950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21961 \begin_layout Standard
21962 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21968 \begin_layout Standard
21969 The rule can be colored by redefining the command
21970 \begin_inset Flex Code
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 This is done by inserting the command
21985 \begin_layout LyX-Code
21990 columnseprulecolor}{
21995 \begin_layout Standard
21996 as \SpecialChar TeX
21997 Code before the multicolumn inset.
21999 \begin_inset Flex Code
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 in this command by a color of your choice.
22009 You can use all pre- and self-defined colors.
22018 \begin_inset space ~
22023 for more information about pre- and self-defined colors.
22024 To go back to the default color insert the command
22027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
22032 columnseprulecolor}{
22037 \begin_layout Standard
22038 Here is the example with a cyan rule and 1
22039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22042 cm column separation:
22045 \begin_layout Standard
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 columnseprulecolor}{
22074 \begin_layout Standard
22075 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22084 You're surprised to see me,
22086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 I acknowledged that I was.
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22109 and when I chanced to see you go into this house,
22110 as I came hobbling after you,
22111 I thought to myself,
22112 I'll just step in and see that kind gentleman,
22113 and tell him that if I was a bit gruff in my manner there was not any harm meant,
22114 and that I am much obliged to him for picking up my books.
22115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22127 You make too much of a trifle,
22128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22136 May I ask how you knew who I was?
22137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22151 if it isn't too great a liberty,
22152 I am a neighbour of yours,
22153 for you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street,
22154 and very happy to see you,
22156 Maybe you collect yourself,
22161 \begin_inset space ~
22177 \begin_inset space ~
22182 With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
22186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22197 \begin_layout Standard
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 columnseprule}{0pt}
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22216 columnseprulecolor}{
22224 \begin_inset Note Note
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 go back to the default
22236 \begin_layout Section
22238 \change_inserted 564990737 1671270380
22242 \begin_layout Subsection
22244 \change_inserted 564990737 1671270398
22246 \change_deleted 564990737 1671270396
22252 \begin_layout Standard
22255 as well as any other text processor uses by default rectangular paragraphs.
22256 For special cases like for example posters,
22257 invitation cards or poems you can modify the paragraph shape to one of your choice.
22259 \change_deleted 564990737 1672311802
22260 This can be done by using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22262 \begin_inset Flex Code
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 which is loaded by using in the document settings the module
22273 Custom paragraph shapes
22276 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311802
22277 This module uses the
22281 package to provide over a dozen paragraph shapes as well as commands to define custom shapes.
22287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22291 \begin_layout Standard
22296 provides the following shapes:
22299 \begin_layout Standard
22300 \begin_inset Tabular
22301 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="13" columns="3">
22302 <features booktabs="true" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22303 <column alignment="left" valignment="middle" width="16col%">
22304 <column alignment="left" valignment="middle" width="40col%">
22305 <column alignment="left" valignment="middle" width="35col%">
22306 <row endhead="true">
22307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <row interlinespace="default">
22345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 Circle with circular hole (in the size of a CD/DVD)
22367 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 take care there is not too much text
22380 <row interlinespace="default">
22381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 calculation might fail
22416 <row interlinespace="default">
22417 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 Rhomboid (symbolizing a
22435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <row interlinespace="default">
22460 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 <row interlinespace="default">
22495 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22529 <row interlinespace="default">
22530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 Nut for bolt (hexagon with circular hole)
22552 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 <row interlinespace="default">
22565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 <row interlinespace="default">
22600 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <row interlinespace="default">
22635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22657 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 <row interlinespace="default">
22670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 Normal/reversed rain drop
22692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 calculation might fail
22705 <row interlinespace="default">
22706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22724 The \SpecialChar TeX
22730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 <row interlinespace="default">
22743 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 \begin_inset Newline newline
22758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 Triangles in different orientations
22769 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 \begin_layout Standard
22789 To use a shape for your paragraph,
22790 simply select it in \SpecialChar LyX
22791 's pull-down box for environments in the toolbar.
22794 \begin_layout Standard
22795 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
22801 \begin_layout Standard
22802 Here is an example paragraph in the shape of a nut:
22805 \begin_layout Standard
22806 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22815 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22816 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22817 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22819 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22820 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22821 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22822 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22823 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22824 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22828 \begin_layout Standard
22829 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22835 \begin_layout Standard
22836 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 paragraphs cannot run over a page break.
22857 \begin_layout Standard
22858 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22864 \begin_layout Standard
22866 \begin_inset Flex Code
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 takes care that the shape will always be preserved,
22876 no matter how much text is in the paragraph.
22877 Therefore the paragraph size changes with the amount of contained text.
22878 This can lead to paragraph sizes exceeding the page margins.
22879 To demonstrate the size scaling,
22880 here is the same example paragraph but with twice as much text:
22883 \begin_layout Standard
22884 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
22893 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22894 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22895 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22897 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22898 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22899 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22900 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22901 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22902 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22904 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22905 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22906 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22908 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22909 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22910 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22911 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22912 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22913 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22917 \begin_layout Standard
22918 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22924 \begin_layout Standard
22925 An exception is the shape
22930 It cannot be scaled because it must fit the size of a CD/DVD.
22931 Therefore the amount of text that fits into the shape is limited.
22932 \begin_inset Newline newline
22944 meaning that the calculation of their size can fail,
22945 depending on the amount of text.
22946 You will then get the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22951 Arithmetic overflow
22952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22956 In this case one can try to remove or add some text;
22957 if nothing works one has to use another shape.
22960 \begin_layout Standard
22961 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22967 \begin_layout Standard
22968 For shapes with tips you will maybe see that \SpecialChar LaTeX
22969 's hyphenation routine fails for text in the tips.
22970 Therefore it is often necessary to add hyphenation points
22975 arg "specialchar-insert hyphenation"
22980 ) to the corresponding text parts.
22983 \begin_layout Standard
22984 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22991 Shapepar paragraphs are either always centered or placed on the page so that their left border touches the left page margin.
22992 You can therefore not use the paragraph dialog to align such paragraphs.
22993 A solution is to put the paragraph into a minipage or parbox and align the box.
22994 The problem is hereby to find the right width for the box.
22995 Because if it is too wide and you center the box,
22996 the paragraph is not centered too because it sticks at the left side of the box.
22997 So you might have to play a bit with the width until it fits.
22998 Here are two heart-shaped paragraphs,
22999 the first one is not aligned,
23000 the second one is right-aligned:
23003 \begin_layout Standard
23004 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
23010 \begin_layout Heart
23014 Lo\SpecialChar softhyphen
23015 rem ipsum dolor sit amet,
23016 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
23017 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
23019 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
23020 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
23021 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
23024 \begin_layout Standard
23025 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23031 \begin_layout Standard
23034 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23044 height_special "totalheight"
23049 backgroundcolor "none"
23052 \begin_layout Heart
23056 Lo\SpecialChar softhyphen
23057 rem ipsum dolor sit amet,
23058 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
23059 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
23061 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
23062 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
23063 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
23071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
23075 \begin_layout Standard
23076 You can define any shape you want.
23077 Doing this manually is a lot of work because every coordinate must be specified.
23078 But there is a way to let the computer calculate the coordinates:
23081 \begin_layout Enumerate
23082 Install the program
23083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
23086 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/jpgfdraw"
23094 \begin_layout Enumerate
23101 TeX/LaTeX\SpecialChar menuseparator
23102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23105 and select the font size you are using in your document.
23106 For example this document uses the size 12
23107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23113 \begin_layout Enumerate
23117 \begin_layout Enumerate
23120 TeX/LaTeX\SpecialChar menuseparator
23123 to export the shape to coordinates.
23124 In the appearing dialog use either the outline of your shape for the coordinates or the path itself.
23128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 For more information see
23130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
23132 target "http://www.dickimaw-books.com/apps/jpgfdraw/manual/shapepar.html"
23145 \begin_layout Standard
23146 The coordinates are written into a \SpecialChar TeX
23148 To use it for your \SpecialChar LyX
23152 \begin_layout Enumerate
23153 Place the cursor before the first character of your paragraph (or into a new empty one).
23156 \begin_layout Enumerate
23157 Open in \SpecialChar LyX
23160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23161 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
23163 \begin_inset space ~
23169 select the file and use
23178 \begin_layout Standard
23179 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
23185 \begin_layout Standard
23186 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 The changed shape only applies to the current paragraph;
23196 everything is reset to normal for the next paragraph.
23197 Therefore the shape definition file must be input into every paragraph with the desired shape.
23205 \begin_layout Standard
23206 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23212 \begin_layout Standard
23213 Here is an example:
23216 \begin_layout Standard
23217 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23223 \begin_layout Standard
23224 \begin_inset CommandInset include
23226 filename "SpecialParagraphShape.tex"
23233 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
23234 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
23235 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
23237 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
23238 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
23239 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
23240 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
23241 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
23242 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
23246 \begin_layout Standard
23247 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23253 \begin_layout Standard
23259 to draw complexer shapes in
23263 you can draw the shape in a program of your choice and import the resulting image to
23268 Then you only need to draw a line or spline along the outline of the image.
23271 \begin_layout Standard
23272 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23278 \begin_layout Standard
23281 Custom paragraph shapes
23283 also provides the two commands
23291 which can be used to define custom shapes coordinate by coordinate.
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 These commands are internally used for all shapes described here.
23301 For information how these styles are used and about further customization possibilities,
23303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
23305 name "documentation"
23306 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/shapepar/shapepar.pdf"
23312 \begin_inset Flex Code
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 \begin_layout Subsection
23326 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23330 \begin_layout Hanging
23332 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23333 This module adds the
23339 one where all but the first line of the paragraph is indented.
23340 This may not appear in your \SpecialChar LyX
23341 document but will appear in the final output.
23344 \begin_layout Subsection
23346 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23349 name "subsec:Initials"
23353 Initials (Drop Caps)
23356 \begin_layout Initial
23358 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23359 \begin_inset Argument 2
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23373 \begin_inset Argument 3
23376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23386 module adds a drop capitals paragraph style
23390 for paragraph environments which you can use wherever you want to have drop capitals.
23391 You then have three more items in the
23398 \begin_layout Itemize
23400 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23405 which creates an inset for the drop capital
23408 \begin_layout Itemize
23410 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23415 which creates an inset for the rest of the word
23418 \begin_layout Itemize
23420 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23425 which allow you configure the formatting of the drop capital.
23428 \begin_layout Standard
23430 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
23431 To customize the appearance of the style,
23434 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
23435 Embedded Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
23436 Objects Surrounded by Text\SpecialChar menuseparator
23442 \begin_layout Section
23444 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23448 \begin_layout Subsection
23450 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23451 Hyphenatable Text Markup
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23456 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23457 This package defines text styles to highlight,
23460 underline and capitalize/small-cap text by means of the
23465 As opposed to the markup provided by the Text Properties dialog,
23466 words marked-up with
23472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
23474 name "soul documentation"
23475 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/generic/soul/soul.pdf"
23483 \begin_layout Subsection
23485 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23489 \begin_layout Standard
23491 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23492 This module defines some character styles for logical markup:
23496 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23517 \begin_inset Flex Emph
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23536 \begin_inset Flex Strong
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23551 \begin_inset Flex Code
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23564 which are accessed via the
23569 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23571 \begin_inset space ~
23575 \begin_inset space ~
23587 \begin_layout Chapter
23589 \change_deleted 564990737 1671304317
23593 \change_inserted 564990737 1671304322
23595 \change_deleted 564990737 1671304331
23596 ies with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23602 \begin_layout Standard
23603 The most basic information about how to use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23608 with \SpecialChar LyX
23609 is contained in the section
23611 Bibliography databases
23618 The following subsections explain special bibliography features supported by \SpecialChar LyX
23622 \begin_layout Section
23623 Alternative Citation Styles
23626 \begin_layout Standard
23627 Standard Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23633 \begin_inset space \space{}
23637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23644 ) to refer to a cited work.
23646 in many scientific disciplines,
23647 other citation styles are in use.
23648 The most common one is the author-year style (e.
23649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23653 \begin_inset space \space{}
23657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23666 supports three packages that provide this style,
23668 \begin_inset Flex Code
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 \begin_inset Flex Code
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 \begin_inset Flex Code
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 Each of these packages has their pros and cons,
23701 which cannot be listed in detail.
23702 If you only want to have simple author-year (or author-numerical) style,
23703 or if you want to use one of the countless style files for
23704 \begin_inset Flex Code
23707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 then the established
23715 \begin_inset Flex Code
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23724 package is probably your choice.
23725 If you look for specific citation styles common in law studies,
23726 you might consider the
23727 \begin_inset Flex Code
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 If you want to have full control over the formatting or look for advanced features such as ibidem,
23738 footnote citations,
23739 full title citations,
23740 advanced date formats (such as 400 BC) or full localization to other languages than English,
23741 you should definitely consider
23742 \begin_inset Flex Code
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 which exceeds all other packages in terms of features,
23753 but is also quite heavy and more resource-hungry.
23756 \begin_layout Standard
23757 The handling of these packages in \SpecialChar LyX
23758 is basically the same.
23760 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23771 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 Biblatex (Natbib mode)
23824 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23844 \begin_inset space ~
23847 6.5.3 in the User's Guide for more information on these choices).
23848 With all these packages,
23849 you will get some extra features in the citation dialog and you can select the style of the reference (
23850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23886 Note that either package needs specifically designed style files.
23887 They all ship their own,
23888 but there are lots of additional style files,
23889 and there is even an interactive style file builder
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 \begin_inset Flex URL
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/custom-bib/
23911 \begin_inset Flex Code
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 \begin_layout Section
23924 Subdivided Bibliographies
23927 \begin_layout Standard
23928 Sometimes you might need to divide your bibliography into several sections.
23929 If you are for instance a historian,
23930 the possibility to separate sources and scientific works is most likely a
23931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23940 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23941 itself does not allow you to do this.
23942 But with the help of some \SpecialChar LaTeX
23944 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23945 can be extended to fit your needs.
23948 \begin_layout Standard
23950 provides native support for one of these packages,
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 \begin_inset Flex URL
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/bibtopic/
23976 The advantage of this package (compared to other packages such as
23980 ) is that you don't need to define new citation commands.
23982 you need to prepare different bibliographic databases which include the entries for the different sections of the bibliography.
23984 If you want to divide your bibliography into the sections
23985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24001 you first need to create two bibliographic databases,
24003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24007 \begin_inset space \space{}
24011 \begin_inset Flex Code
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 \begin_inset Flex Code
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 \begin_layout Standard
24036 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24047 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 Subdivided bibliography
24067 Now you can insert multiple Bib\SpecialChar TeX
24069 one for each section of your bibliography.
24070 Returning to our example:
24071 Insert the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
24073 \begin_inset Flex Code
24076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 and a second one for the database
24083 \begin_inset Flex Code
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 You are free to use the same or different styles for each section.
24095 you can choose if the bibliography section should contain
24096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24099 all cited references
24100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24103 of the specified database(s) (which is the default),
24105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24108 all uncited references
24109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24121 This might be useful if you would like to separate your bibliography into three sections:
24123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24149 The titles for the sections can be added as ordinary sections or subsections.
24151 \begin_inset Flex Code
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 removes the bibliography title,
24161 you have to manually re-add that,
24162 too (as a chapter* or section*,
24166 \begin_layout Standard
24172 the procedure is a bit different.
24183 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 Subdivided bibliography
24192 option is disabled if you use
24202 provides its own means to generate subdivided bibliographies.
24203 You can either add keywords to bibliography entries via the
24204 \begin_inset Flex Code
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 entry option and then filter bibliography sections by keyword (by adding
24214 \begin_inset Flex Code
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 field of the dialog that opens if you left-click on the
24234 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 Biblatex Generated Bibliography
24244 or you can filter by entry types (such as
24253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24258 \begin_inset Flex Code
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 \begin_inset Flex Code
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 or you can create so-called
24289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24292 Bibliography Categories
24293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24296 to which you can assign individual entries.
24297 Please refer to the Biblatex manual,
24300 Subdivided Bibliographies
24306 \begin_layout Section
24307 Multiple Bibliographies
24308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24310 name "subsec:Multiple-Bibliographies"
24317 \begin_layout Standard
24318 Multiple bibliographies,
24320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24324 \begin_inset space \space{}
24327 a bibliography for each part,
24330 subsection or child (sub-document) of the document,
24331 are also supported by \SpecialChar LyX
24333 In order to enable it,
24335 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24340 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
24346 and select the relevant unit (e.
24347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24360 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24364 Multiple Bibliographies
24370 Then add a Bib(la)\SpecialChar TeX
24371 bibliography to each unit (e.
24372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24376 section) of your document.
24378 a separate bibliography,
24379 containing only the references done in the current unit is generated.
24382 \begin_layout Standard
24383 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
24386 \begin_inset Flex Code
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 \begin_inset Flex Code
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24405 package is used to create multiple bibliographies.
24406 The former package is used if you select
24407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24419 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24423 Sectioned Bibliography
24429 In all other cases,
24431 \begin_inset Flex Code
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 An alternative approach,
24446 if you are willing to use some
24447 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 \begin_inset space ~
24462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24464 reference "sec:Inserting-TeX-Code"
24471 \begin_inset Flex Code
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 \begin_inset Flex Code
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 encloses the specified units in
24498 \begin_inset Flex Code
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24508 \begin_inset Flex Code
24511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 \begin_inset Flex Code
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24531 in order to create the units.
24532 Note that this approach has some limitations.
24534 every citation reference has to be inside some
24535 \begin_inset Flex Code
24538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 So citations outside a defined unit (e.
24546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24550 before the first section if you use
24551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24567 You can also create your own units by entering
24568 \begin_inset Flex Code
24571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24580 \begin_inset Flex Code
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 as \SpecialChar TeX
24592 code (for instance to work around the mentioned limitation).
24596 \begin_inset Flex Code
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 s cannot be nested.
24606 A second limitation is that
24607 \begin_inset Flex Code
24610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 always processes all references of a bibliography database,
24617 even if they are not cited.
24618 This can result in odd labels (e.
24619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24631 if two works of this author from 2014 are in the database,
24632 even if only one is cited).
24635 \begin_layout Standard
24642 \begin_inset Flex Code
24645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24651 option is used instead.
24652 If you need specific units,
24653 you can start them with the \SpecialChar TeX
24655 \begin_inset Flex Code
24658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 \begin_inset Flex Code
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24680 If you also want to control the end of the unit,
24681 use the environment
24682 \begin_inset Flex Code
24685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 \begin_inset Flex Code
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 \begin_inset Flex Code
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 s cannot be nested.
24720 In addition to the individual bibliography of the current unit,
24725 also provides an easy way to output all bibliographies,
24728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24732 at the end of the document).
24734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24737 all reference units
24738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24741 from the Content combo box of the Bib(la)TeX inset dialog in order to achieve this.
24742 Please refer to the
24746 manual for more information on this topic.
24749 \begin_layout Chapter
24751 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355654
24755 \change_inserted 564990737 1671355667
24757 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355661
24759 \change_inserted 564990737 1671355684
24761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24763 name "chap:bullets"
24768 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355684
24770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24781 \begin_layout Standard
24787 \begin_layout Section
24791 \begin_layout Standard
24793 provides 216 bullet shapes that can be accessed from a simple dialog.
24794 Using this dialog you can easily specify what bullet shape to use at each level of an itemized list.
24795 These settings are document-wide so you won't be able to specify different sets of bullets for different paragraphs.
24799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 actually you can but you'll have to do it by hand.
24809 \begin_layout Section
24813 \begin_layout Standard
24814 Open the dialog by selecting the
24815 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24825 menu item and then select the
24826 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24838 \begin_layout Standard
24839 The dialog provides you with a table of bullet shapes.
24840 A column of buttons on the left of the table provides access to the six different panels of bullet shapes.
24841 The row of buttons across the top is used to select which bullet depth you are changing.
24843 \change_deleted 244031559 1603875981
24844 A text entry under the table shows the currently selected bullet shape's \SpecialChar LaTeX
24845 equivalent and this can be edited if desired.
24846 If you do modify the text you will also need to specify any needed packages in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24852 \begin_layout Standard
24853 The six panels are divided up by the packages they require.
24854 The following table shows the mappings from button name to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24858 \begin_layout Standard
24860 \begin_inset Tabular
24861 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
24862 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24863 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24934 base \SpecialChar LaTeX
24942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 \begin_layout Standard
25140 doesn't stop you using bullets from packages you don't have.
25141 If you get errors from \SpecialChar LaTeX
25142 when you try to view or print the file,
25143 then it is likely you are missing a package.
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 doesn't restrict your use since you may be editing locally and exporting elsewhere.
25157 \begin_layout Section
25161 \begin_layout Standard
25162 Select which bullet depth you want to change then select the bullet shape and size.
25163 Any changes will not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25165 but are visible when viewing the document.
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 You can reset a bullet shape to the default simply by clicking your right mouse button on the appropriate bullet depth button.
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138075
25176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25178 name "fn:If-you-really"
25188 want to have multiple sets of paragraphs with different sets of bullets in each,
25189 then you're going to have to get your hands dirty with \SpecialChar TeX
25191 The bullet selection dialog can help though because it provides you with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25192 code for a wide range of bullet shapes.
25193 To make your own custom paragraphs you have the following options:
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 \begin_layout Itemize
25243 Use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25245 \begin_inset Flex Code
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 to specify a new bullet shape for a given depth.
25257 You'll also need to save the current bullet shape so you can restore it again afterwards.
25258 In this itemized list the following \SpecialChar LaTeX
25259 code was used to change the bullet used for the first depth.
25263 \begin_layout LyX-Code
25273 \begin_layout LyX-Code
25290 \begin_layout Itemize
25291 Note that the itemize depth is specified in Roman numerals as part of the
25300 \begin_layout Itemize
25301 \begin_inset Argument item:1
25304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 Specify each individual entry by starting each item with the bullet shape enclosed in a
25327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25334 inset (available at
25336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25340 \begin_inset Flex Noun
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 this item was started with
25353 \begin_inset Flex Code
25356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 You'll also need to revert the labelitem back to its previous setting for the global bullet shape settings to remain in effect.
25393 The way used here was:
25396 \begin_layout LyX-Code
25411 \begin_layout Chapter
25415 \begin_layout Section
25416 Multipart Documents
25419 \begin_layout Subsection
25423 \begin_layout Standard
25424 When you are working on a large file with many sections,
25425 it is often convenient to break up the document into several files,
25426 or perhaps you have something where a table may change from time to time,
25427 but the preceding text does not.
25429 you should seriously consider using multipart documents.
25431 scientific papers often have five major sections:
25437 Each of these could be its own separate \SpecialChar LyX
25440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25447 file which contains the title,
25452 plus the five included files.
25453 It is important to note that each of these files is a full \SpecialChar LyX
25454 file which can be formatted and printed on its own,
25455 as well as included in a master file.
25456 Each of these files must have the same document class,
25458 don't attempt to mix book classes with article classes.
25459 You may also include \SpecialChar LaTeX
25462 these files must not have their own preamble (i.
25463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25467 \begin_inset space \space{}
25470 everything up to and including the
25471 \begin_inset Flex Code
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 line as well as the
25483 \begin_inset Flex Code
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25494 line must be deleted) or else errors will be generated when you try to make a DVI file.
25497 \begin_layout Standard
25499 allows you to include files quite easily with
25500 \begin_inset Flex Noun
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25506 \begin_inset space ~
25515 When you click on this selection a small box is inserted into the file at the current cursor location.
25516 Clicking on the box raises a dialog which allows you to select the file to be included,
25517 and the method of its inclusion.
25521 \begin_layout Standard
25522 The file selection box should by now be obvious.
25523 The three inclusion methods are
25524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25566 are similar in many ways,
25567 but there are also some notable differences:
25570 \begin_layout Enumerate
25572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25579 are typeset beginning on a new page,
25580 while files that are
25581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25588 are typeset starting on the current page.
25591 \begin_layout Enumerate
25592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25599 files cannot themselves
25600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25626 infinite sub-inputting is possible.
25629 \begin_layout Enumerate
25630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25637 allow for the output of only selected
25638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25646 while maintaining the actual counters (pagination etc.) and references (please refer to the section
25649 \begin_inset space ~
25657 \begin_inset space ~
25662 manual for details).
25665 \begin_layout Standard
25668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25675 is the preferred method for chapters that are outsourced to child documents,
25677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25684 is more suitable for arbitrary file inheritance.
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25696 included file allows you to include a file typeset exactly as it appears in the file,
25698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25702 \begin_inset space \space{}
25706 \begin_inset Flex Code
25709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25716 with the characters set in a fixed-width typewriter font.
25718 spaces in this file are invisible,
25719 though two consecutive spaces are conserved,
25720 unlike \SpecialChar LyX
25721 's normal treatment of spaces.
25724 \begin_inset Flex Noun
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25729 \begin_inset space ~
25733 \begin_inset space ~
25737 \begin_inset space ~
25745 checkbox typesets a mark to unambiguously define the presence of a space.
25749 \begin_layout Standard
25751 the master file is converted into a full \SpecialChar LaTeX
25752 file before typesetting,
25753 while the included files are converted to \SpecialChar LaTeX
25754 files that do not have all the preamble information.
25757 \begin_layout Subsection
25758 Cross-References Between Files
25761 \begin_layout Standard
25762 \begin_inset Box Shadowbox
25772 height_special "totalheight"
25777 backgroundcolor "none"
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25781 This section is somewhat out of date.
25782 Need to describe default master documents and how children are opened when the master is.
25791 \begin_layout Standard
25792 It is possible to set up cross-references between the different files.
25794 open all the files in question:
25795 let's call them A and B in a two file example,
25796 where B is included in A.
25797 Let's say you insert a label in A,
25798 then want to reference it in B.
25799 Open the cross-reference dialog whilst in document B,
25800 and you can select the
25801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25811 \begin_layout Subsection
25812 Bibliography Lists in all Subdocuments
25815 \begin_layout Standard
25816 If you work with child documents,
25817 you might want to have only one main bibliography at the end,
25818 but still be able to have a selected bibliography for the child if you output it on its own.
25819 Here is how to achieve this.
25822 \begin_layout Standard
25823 For the main document,
25824 you just insert a bibliography inset at the place where the main bibliography has to appear (within the master file or within a child).
25825 If the bibliography inset is in the master file,
25826 the references will be inherited by all children,
25827 so they are available in the citation dialog within each child.
25830 \begin_layout Standard
25831 For child-specific bibliographies,
25832 insert bibliography insets within the child documents,
25833 at the place where the bibliography should appear when the child is compiled separately.
25835 the trick is to insert them into a branch (
25837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25838 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
25839 Insert New Branch...
25843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25856 Within the children,
25857 activate the branch (
25859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25860 Settings...\SpecialChar menuseparator
25865 deactivate the branch (
25867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25868 Settings...\SpecialChar menuseparator
25872 Now the child's bibliography will be ignored by the master,
25873 but considered by the child.
25876 \begin_layout Standard
25877 If you need multiple bibliographies (e.
25878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25882 one per child in the
25887 please refer to sec.
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25894 reference "subsec:Multiple-Bibliographies"
25902 \begin_layout Section
25907 \begin_layout Standard
25908 Users sometimes need to be able to
25909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25917 file together with all the images (and other files) on which it depends,
25918 either for sending to a publisher or for sharing with a co-author.
25920 includes a Python script (
25921 \begin_inset Flex Code
25924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25930 ) that automates this process.
25932 you must have either the
25933 \begin_inset Flex Code
25936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 \begin_inset Flex Code
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25952 python modules installed on your system.
25954 the script prefers the
25955 \begin_inset Flex Code
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 \begin_inset Flex Code
25968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25974 format on Unix-like systems and the
25975 \begin_inset Flex Code
25978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25987 \begin_layout Standard
25989 's configuration process will set the script up to export a `\SpecialChar LyX
25991 and this format will then be available under
25992 \begin_inset Flex Code
25995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25996 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
26005 \begin_layout Standard
26006 Independently of the platform,
26007 the generation of a particular archive format can be forced by adding either the
26008 \begin_inset Flex Code
26011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26018 \begin_inset Flex Code
26021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26028 \begin_inset Flex Code
26031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 \begin_inset Flex Code
26041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26047 format) switch to the
26048 \begin_inset Flex Code
26051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26053 \SpecialChar menuseparator
26061 \begin_inset Flex Code
26064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
26066 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
26067 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
26074 (Make sure you add the switch after the script name,
26078 \begin_layout Section
26079 Fancy Headers and Footers
26082 \begin_layout Standard
26083 The default page layout is rather plain;
26085 \begin_inset Flex Code
26088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26095 all you get is a centered page number at the bottom of the page.
26096 This document uses KOMA-script's book class,
26097 so it appears to be a bit fancier.
26098 But to really put on a show,
26099 you need to set the document page style to
26100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26108 as mentioned in the
26113 This section describes the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26114 code you need to insert in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
26115 preamble in order to get the desired effects.
26118 \begin_layout Standard
26119 For more information on fancy headers,
26121 \begin_inset Flex Code
26124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 package documentation.
26132 \begin_inset Flex URL
26135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26137 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/fancyhdr.html
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 The page header is divided into three fields,
26147 not surprisingly labeled
26148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26174 The footer is also divided into these three fields.
26175 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
26176 commands to set these fields in the simplest manner are
26177 \begin_inset Flex Code
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26190 \begin_inset Flex Code
26193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 \begin_inset Flex Code
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26216 \begin_inset Flex Code
26219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26229 Suppose you wish to put your name in the upper left hand corner of each page.
26230 Simply insert the following command in the preamble:
26234 \begin_layout Standard
26243 \begin_layout Standard
26244 You will now see your name in the upper left.
26245 If a field has a default entry that you would like to get rid of (often the page number appears in the central footer) simply include a command with a blank argument,
26247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26253 \begin_layout Standard
26261 \begin_layout Standard
26262 Let's get really fancy:
26263 lets put the section number with the word
26264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26276 \begin_inset space \space{}
26279 Section 3) in the upper left,
26280 the page number (e.
26281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26285 \begin_inset space \space{}
26288 Page 4) in the upper right,
26289 your name in the lower left,
26290 and the date in the lower right.
26291 The following commands should now appear in the preamble:
26294 \begin_layout Standard
26304 \begin_layout Standard
26312 \begin_layout Standard
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26331 \begin_layout Standard
26339 \begin_layout Standard
26349 \begin_layout Standard
26351 \begin_inset Flex Code
26354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 \begin_inset Flex Code
26366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26374 access \SpecialChar LaTeX
26375 's section and page counters,
26376 and so print out the current section and page number.
26378 \begin_inset Flex Code
26381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26389 simply prints out today's date.
26392 \begin_layout Standard
26393 The thicknesses of the horizontal rules drawn beneath the header and above the footer can also be modified.
26394 If you don't want one of the rules,
26395 set its thickness to 0.
26396 The header rule has a default thickness of 0.4pt,
26397 the footer rule is 0pt.
26403 \begin_inset Flex Code
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26411 headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
26417 \begin_inset Flex Code
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26425 footrulewidth}{0.4pt}
26430 to set the thicknesses.
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 You can switch the header/footer settings on and off for individual pages using commands like
26435 \begin_inset Flex Code
26438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 thispagestyle{empty}
26448 \begin_inset Flex Code
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26454 thispagestyle{plain}
26461 \begin_inset Flex Code
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 thispagestyle{fancy}
26473 Simply insert them in the text on the page you want changed and mark them as \SpecialChar TeX
26476 title pages are marked as plain by default,
26477 while following pages are marked fancy when using the global fancy setting.
26480 \begin_layout Standard
26481 As a final example,
26482 it is possible to include an image in the header or footer.
26483 Suppose you want to put a company logo in the upper lefthand corner.
26484 You might try something like
26487 \begin_layout Standard
26496 includegraphics{logo.eps}}}
26499 \begin_layout Standard
26501 (you may need to preface this with
26502 \begin_inset Flex Code
26505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 usepackage{graphics}
26513 if you don't include graphics elsewhere in your document).
26516 \begin_layout Chapter
26518 and the World Wide Web
26521 \begin_layout Standard
26523 has long supported the export of documents to various web-friendly formats,
26525 Before version 2.0,
26527 HTML export was always accomplished by the use of external converters.
26531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 For details on the use of external converters with \SpecialChar LyX
26538 section of the Customization manual.
26543 These fall into two large groups:
26544 there are converters that use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26545 as an intermediate format,
26547 \begin_inset Flex Code
26550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26558 \begin_inset Flex Code
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 \begin_inset Flex Code
26572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26579 relying upon \SpecialChar LyX
26580 to produce the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26582 and there is a converter that works directly on \SpecialChar LyX
26585 \begin_inset Flex Code
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 All of these have different advantages and disadvantages.
26600 \begin_layout Standard
26601 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
26602 -based converters have the advantage that,
26604 they know everything about the exported document that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26606 Such converters do not care,
26608 if a certain block of code was produced by \SpecialChar LyX
26609 or was Evil Red Text.
26610 These converters know about
26611 \begin_inset Flex Code
26614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 and can often make use of the
26624 \begin_inset Flex Code
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26633 files generated by Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26637 is a very hard language to parse—
26638 it is sometimes said that only \SpecialChar TeX
26639 itself understands \SpecialChar TeX
26641 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
26642 -based converters will often choke on what seem to be quite simple constructs;
26643 complex ones can throw them completely,
26644 and as of this writing,
26650 manual will not export with
26651 \begin_inset Flex Code
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 though the others will.
26662 The other issue concerns how math is handled.
26663 These converters typically convert the formulae into little pictures that are then linked from the HTML document.
26664 Since these are actually generated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26667 But they do not scale well,
26668 and just getting them to look as if they are actually meant to be in your document—
26669 so that the font sizes seem to be roughly the same—
26670 can be a challenge.
26673 \begin_layout Standard
26675 \begin_inset Flex Code
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26688 name "http://pinchito.es/elyxer/"
26689 target "http://pinchito.es/elyxer/"
26694 ) solves some of these problems.
26696 the formulae it produces scale perfectly,
26697 since it renders math using a combination of HTML and CSS rather than converting the formulae to images.
26698 But even moderately complex formula are rendered less well than with
26699 \begin_inset Flex Code
26702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26709 this reflects the limitations of HTML.
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26716 \begin_inset Flex Code
26719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26726 can also use jsMath and MathJax for equations,
26727 but this setting is only available globally and requires one to have access to a server that runs the backend.
26732 More importantly (as of version 1.1.1,
26735 \begin_inset Flex Code
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26745 has limited support for math macros and no support for user-defined paragraph or character styles.
26746 These limitations make
26747 \begin_inset Flex Code
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26757 unsuitable for many of the documents \SpecialChar LyX
26761 these problems could be solved,
26762 but the \SpecialChar LyX
26763 developers have decided to follow a different path and have made \SpecialChar LyX
26764 itself capable of writing XHTML,
26765 just as it is capable of writing \SpecialChar LaTeX
26771 \begin_layout Standard
26772 As of this writing,
26773 XHTML output remains under development and should probably be regarded as
26774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26787 \begin_inset Flex Code
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 development/HTML/HTML.notes
26797 which can be found in the \SpecialChar LyX
26799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26801 name "accessed online"
26802 target "https://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxgit/development/HTML/HTML.notes?rev=master"
26808 usually contains up-to-date information about the state of XHTML output.
26809 See also the list of XHTML bugs on
26810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26812 name "the bug tracker"
26813 target "https://www.lyx.org/trac/query?status=reopened&status=assigned&status=new&max=0&component=xhtml+export&order=id&col=id&col=summary&col=reporter&col=keywords&keywords=%21%7Efixedintrunk&desc=1"
26824 the developers have chosen this approach because it has several potential advantages over the other two.
26827 \begin_layout Standard
26828 These advantages are primarily due to the fact that the XHTML output routines,
26829 since they are part of \SpecialChar LyX
26831 know everything \SpecialChar LyX
26832 knows about the document being exported.
26836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 Another advantage is that,
26838 since these routines are internal to \SpecialChar LyX
26840 they are immune to changes in \SpecialChar LyX
26842 or to changes in the semantics of existing insets.
26847 So they know about the table of contents (as displayed in the outline),
26848 about the counters associated with different paragraph styles,
26849 and about user-defined styles.
26850 The XHTML output routines know what \SpecialChar LyX
26851 knows about internationalization,
26853 so they will output
26854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26874 depending upon the language in effect at the time.
26878 \begin_layout Standard
26880 the output routines know what \SpecialChar LyX
26881 knows about document layout,
26883 about how the document is to be rendered on screen.
26884 We use this information when we output the document as XHTML.
26891 generates CSS style information corresponding to the layout information it uses to render the document on screen:
26892 if section headings are supposed to be sans-serif and bold as seen in \SpecialChar LyX
26894 then (by default) they will be sans-serif and bold when viewed in a web browser,
26896 And this is true not just for pre-defined styles,
26899 including user-defined styles.
26901 the XHTML output routines make no distinction between user-defined paragraph and
26902 \change_deleted 244031559 1603876931
26904 \change_inserted 244031559 1603876940
26907 styles and \SpecialChar LyX
26908 's own pre-defined styles:
26910 everything \SpecialChar LyX
26911 knows about the styles is contained in the layout files.
26912 And much the same is true as regards pre-defined textual insets,
26914 and various custom insets.
26918 \begin_layout Standard
26919 The result is that XHTML output can be customized and extended in exactly the same way \SpecialChar LaTeX
26920 output can be customized and extended:
26921 through layout files and modules.
26922 See chapter five of the
26926 manual for the details.
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26930 The remainder of this chapter contains more detailed information on XHTML output,
26932 and ways to work around those limitations.
26935 \begin_layout Section
26936 Math Output in XHTML
26939 \begin_layout Standard
26941 offers four choices for how math is rendered.
26942 These have various advantages and disadvantages:
26945 \begin_layout Itemize
26947 \begin_inset Newline newline
26950 MathML is a dialect of XML designed specifically for mathematics on the web,
26951 and it typically renders very well in browsers that support it.
26952 The disadvantage is that not all browsers support MathML,
26953 and support is not complete even in the Gecko-based browsers,
26955 \begin_inset Newline newline
26958 If \SpecialChar LyX
26959 is unable to render a formula as MathML—
26961 if the formula uses the
26962 \begin_inset Flex Code
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26972 then it will instead output the formula as an image.
26976 \begin_layout Itemize
26978 \begin_inset Newline newline
26981 As mentioned above,
26983 \begin_inset Flex Code
26986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26992 outputs math as HTML,
26997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26999 has borrowed some of the CSS for its HTML output from
27000 \begin_inset Flex Code
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 For simple formulae,
27015 this can work quite well,
27016 though with more complicated formulae it tends to break down.
27018 this method has the advantage that it is very widely supported and so it may be appropriate for documents that contain only a little,
27019 fairly simple math.
27020 \begin_inset Newline newline
27023 If Lyx is unable to render a formula as HTML—
27025 if the formula uses the
27026 \begin_inset Flex Code
27029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27036 then it will instead output the formula as an image.
27040 \begin_layout Itemize
27042 \begin_inset Newline newline
27046 \begin_inset Flex Code
27049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27057 will output formulae as images,
27058 the very same images,
27060 that are used for instant preview.
27064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27065 Instant preview does
27069 have to be on for images to be output,
27075 The advantage to this method is that the images are simply generated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27077 so they are very accurate.
27079 as mentioned earlier,
27080 is that these are bitmapped images,
27081 so they do not scale terribly well,
27082 and one cannot copy them,
27084 \begin_inset Newline newline
27087 The size of the images can be controlled by setting the
27088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27091 Math Images Scaling
27092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27096 \begin_inset Flex Noun
27099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27112 For those who want to know,
27113 this controls the resolution of the image in dots per inch and is based upon a default of 75 dpi.
27119 \begin_inset Newline newline
27122 If \SpecialChar LyX
27123 for some reason fails to create an image for a formula (e.g.,
27124 if a required \SpecialChar LaTeX
27125 package is not installed),
27126 then it will fall back to outputing the raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
27130 \begin_layout Itemize
27133 \begin_inset Newline newline
27138 will happily output math as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27140 As well as being the output of last resort,
27141 this method can be used with such tools as
27142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27145 target "http://www.math.union.edu/~dpvc/jsMath/"
27151 which uses JavaScript to render \SpecialChar LaTeX
27152 embedded in HTML documents.
27154 wraps the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27156 \begin_inset Flex Code
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27165 (for inline formulas) or
27166 \begin_inset Flex Code
27169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27175 (for displayed formulas) with
27176 \begin_inset Flex Code
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27186 as is required for jsMath.
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 One of these output methods must be selected under
27191 \begin_inset Flex Noun
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27206 This is a document-wide setting,
27210 \begin_layout Standard
27213 will offer the user the option to select an alternate output method for a particular inset,
27215 one that isn't being rendered very well by MathML.
27219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27221 since \SpecialChar LyX
27222 falls back to images if the inset contains ERT,
27223 then one can force output as an image by putting some harmless ERT into the math,
27226 \begin_inset Formula $a=b\relax$
27237 \begin_layout Section
27238 Bibliography and Citations
27241 \begin_layout Standard
27242 XHTML output fully supports bibliographies and citations.
27246 \begin_layout Standard
27247 Citation labels are generated by the same machinery that generates \SpecialChar LyX
27248 's on-screen labels,
27249 so the labels will look in the output much as they do in \SpecialChar LyX
27252 If you are using numerical citations,
27253 then \SpecialChar LyX
27254 will output numerical labels,
27255 such as [1] or [17],
27256 rather than simply showing the citation key in square brackets,
27257 as it does on-screen.
27258 If you are using author-year citations,
27259 then \SpecialChar LyX
27260 will add lowercase letters to the years,
27261 just as Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27263 if it finds more than one citation for a given author-year combination.
27264 The labels will be printed with the bibliography entries.
27265 Note that there is,
27267 no way to customize the appearance of the labels,
27269 to choose between square brackets and parentheses.
27272 \begin_layout Standard
27273 Bibliography output is handled by the same machinery that handles the presentation of reference information in the citation dialog,
27274 so you will see in the XHTML output pretty much what you would see if you were to look at a given entry in the citation dialog.
27275 The formatting can be customized in your layout file or,
27282 manual for the details.
27285 \begin_layout Standard
27286 The main defect at present is that cross-referenced information is printed with every entry with which it is associated.
27287 So you can see things like this:
27290 \begin_layout Quote
27293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27296 Context and Logical Form
27297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27303 Language in Context:
27307 Oxford University Press,
27313 \begin_layout Quote
27316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27319 Semantics in Context
27320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27326 Language in Context:
27330 Oxford University Press,
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27337 This should be fixed before long.
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 There is no support at present for sectioned bibliographies.
27342 If you have multiple bibliographies,
27343 then \SpecialChar LyX
27344 will print the same bibliography over and over.
27347 \begin_layout Section
27351 \begin_layout Standard
27353 will happily export indexes as XHTML,
27354 but with certain limitations at the moment.
27357 \begin_layout Standard
27358 Index export will be most reliable when you do not attempt to use the fancy constructs that are described in the section on indexes in the
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27367 The main issue here is that \SpecialChar LyX
27368 itself does not really handle these.
27369 It just lets you enter what you would have to enter in raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
27375 We'll describe how they are handled using the subsection headings from that section.
27378 \begin_layout Itemize
27379 Grouping Index Entries (aka,
27382 makes an effort to support these,
27383 but the entries must be separated by
27384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27394 there must be spaces around the exclamation point.
27395 This is because it is otherwise too difficult to check for escaped exclamation points,
27400 \begin_layout Itemize
27402 There is no support at all for page ranges,
27403 since these make no sense with XHMTL.
27405 you will just get two index entries,
27409 \begin_layout Itemize
27411 There is no support for cross-referencing.
27412 If \SpecialChar LyX
27413 finds an entry containing the
27414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27417 |see\SpecialChar ldots
27419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27423 it is just dropped,
27424 and the rest is treated as an ordinary index entry.
27427 \begin_layout Itemize
27430 does support attempts to fix the sorting order.
27431 It will take what is before the first `@' it finds and use that for sorting,
27432 taking what follows the first `@' to be the actual entry.
27435 does not check for escaped `@',
27436 so do not try to index email addresses.
27439 \begin_layout Itemize
27440 Index Entry Layout:
27441 You can format entries by using the text style dialog,
27442 or by using any other method available within \SpecialChar LyX
27444 There is no support for constructs like:
27446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27455 if \SpecialChar LyX
27456 finds a pipe symbol,
27459 it will delete it and everything that follows it.
27462 \begin_layout Itemize
27464 There is no support for multiple indexes.
27466 all index entries will be printed as one large index.
27467 To avoid our printing several versions of the index,
27468 we print only the main index,
27469 so make sure you have one.
27472 \begin_layout Section
27473 Nomenclature and Glossary
27476 \begin_layout Standard
27477 There is at present no support for glossaries.
27478 Adding it would be fairly trivial,
27482 \begin_layout Chapter
27484 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534180
27488 \begin_layout Standard
27490 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534386
27493 can generate documents in the DocBook XML vocabulary.
27494 With versions 2.3 and before,
27495 only select templates could be used to generate DocBook documents (only version 4).
27496 Starting with \SpecialChar LyX
27498 most \SpecialChar LyX
27499 layouts can generate valid DocBook documents (only version 5).
27500 This feature is built into \SpecialChar LyX
27501 and does not require the use of external tools.
27504 \begin_layout Standard
27506 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534437
27507 The result is that the DocBook output can be customized and extended in exactly the same way \SpecialChar LaTeX
27508 output can be customized and extended:
27509 through layout files and modules.
27510 See chapter five of the
27514 manual for the details.
27517 \begin_layout Standard
27519 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534475
27520 Most \SpecialChar LyX
27521 features are supported with DocBook,
27525 \begin_layout Itemize
27527 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534741
27528 Math output is performed mostly in MathML (the major exception being constructions not supported by \SpecialChar LyX
27532 All formulae are also available in raw \SpecialChar TeX
27533 in the DocBook output for further processing.
27536 \begin_layout Itemize
27538 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534852
27539 Bibliographies and citations are implemented,
27540 including with an external BibTeX file.
27541 Bibliography entries are not prerendered when the detailed information are available,
27542 but rather output with the standard DocBook constructs.
27543 The external DocBook processor is expected to handle the rendering of entries.
27546 \begin_layout Itemize
27548 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534863
27549 Indexes are supported,
27550 including multiple indices.
27557 and cross-references (
27562 with the exception of the same symbols escaped.
27571 ) are not supported.
27572 There is no support for escaping of index entries.
27575 \begin_layout Itemize
27577 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534884
27578 Glossaries are implemented.
27581 \begin_layout Standard
27583 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534894
27584 Two major parameters can be set at the document level.
27587 \begin_layout Itemize
27589 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534948
27592 can generate tables either as HTML (default value) or CALS,
27593 depending on the user's requirements.
27594 Most DocBook processors accept both formats.
27597 \begin_layout Itemize
27599 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616535006
27602 MathML is included within its own name space,
27604 The implication is that there must be an indication of the tags belonging to the MathML standard.
27605 Three choices are offered:
27610 \begin_layout Itemize
27612 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616535044
27614 the MathML name space is defined for each formula (using the
27618 attribute on each formula)
27621 \begin_layout Itemize
27623 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616535090
27629 the MathML name space is defined at the document level (using the
27633 attribute on the root element).
27634 Each MathML is prefixed with
27645 \begin_layout Itemize
27647 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616620405
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27665 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616620470
27666 This option is especially useful if you want \SpecialChar LyX
27667 to match your personal style or to work with buggy software that only accepts one prefix for MathML.
27673 \begin_layout Chapter
27674 The \SpecialChar LyX
27678 \begin_layout Section
27682 \begin_layout Standard
27683 The `\SpecialChar LyX
27684 server' allows other programs to talk to \SpecialChar LyX
27686 invoke \SpecialChar LyX
27688 and retrieve information about the \SpecialChar LyX
27690 This is only intended for advanced users,
27691 but they should find it useful.
27692 It is by writing to the \SpecialChar LyX
27695 that bibliography managers,
27698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27705 citations to \SpecialChar LyX
27709 \begin_layout Section
27710 Starting the \SpecialChar LyX
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27714 name "sec:Starting-the-Server"
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 The \SpecialChar LyX
27723 server works through the use of a pair of named pipes.
27724 These are usually located in
27725 \begin_inset Flex Code
27728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27735 (except on Windows,
27740 named pipes are special objects located in
27741 \begin_inset Flex Code
27744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27756 ) and have the names
27757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27761 \begin_inset Flex Code
27764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27779 \begin_inset Flex Code
27782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27793 External programs write into
27794 \begin_inset Flex Code
27797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27803 and read back data from
27804 \begin_inset Flex Code
27807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27814 The stem of the pipe names can be defined in the
27815 \begin_inset Flex Noun
27818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27827 \begin_inset Flex Code
27830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27831 "/home/myhome/lyxpipe"
27838 \begin_inset Flex Code
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27855 on Windows (where any working path instead of lyxpipe can be used,
27857 \begin_inset Flex Code
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 configure this manually in order for the server to start.
27886 \begin_layout Standard
27889 \begin_inset Flex Code
27892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 \begin_inset Flex Code
27902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 ' to create the pipes.
27909 If one of the pipes already exists,
27911 will assume that another \SpecialChar LyX
27912 process is already running and will not start the server.
27913 On POSIX (Unix like) systems,
27914 if for some other reason,
27916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27923 pipe is left in existence when \SpecialChar LyX
27925 then \SpecialChar LyX
27926 will try to delete it.
27927 If this fails for some reason,
27928 you will need to delete the pipes manually and then restart \SpecialChar LyX
27931 pipes are deleted by the OS on program termination or crash,
27933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27940 pipes should not be possible.
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27944 To have several \SpecialChar LyX
27945 processes with servers at the same time,
27946 you have to use different configurations,
27947 perhaps by using separate user directories,
27949 \begin_inset Flex Code
27952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27962 \begin_layout Standard
27963 If you are developing a client program,
27964 you might find it useful to enable debugging information from the \SpecialChar LyX
27966 Do this by starting \SpecialChar LyX
27968 \begin_inset Flex Code
27971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 You can find a complete example client written in C++ in the source distribution as
27982 \begin_inset Flex Code
27985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 development/lyxserver/server_monitor.cpp
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 Another useful tool is the command-line based client found in
27996 \begin_inset Flex Code
27999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28000 src/client/lyxclient
28008 \begin_layout Section
28009 Normal communication
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28013 To issue a \SpecialChar LyX
28015 the client writes a line of ASCII text into the input pipe.
28016 This line has the following format:
28019 \begin_layout Quote
28033 \begin_layout Description
28034 clientname is a name that the client can choose arbitrarily.
28035 Its only use is that \SpecialChar LyX
28036 will echo it if it sends an answer—
28037 so a client can dispatch results from different requesters.
28040 \begin_layout Description
28041 function is the function you want \SpecialChar LyX
28043 It is the same as the commands you'd use in the minibuffer.
28046 \begin_layout Description
28047 argument is an optional argument which is meaningful only to some functions (for instance,
28049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28056 LFUN will insert the argument as text at the cursor position).
28059 \begin_layout Standard
28060 The answer from \SpecialChar LyX
28061 will arrive in the output pipe and be of the form
28064 \begin_layout Quote
28078 \begin_layout Standard
28087 are just echoed from the command request,
28092 is more or less useful information filled according to how the command execution worked out.
28095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28103 will return information about the internal state of \SpecialChar LyX
28105 while other will return an empty data-response.
28106 This means that the command execution went fine.
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28111 the response from \SpecialChar LyX
28112 will have this form
28115 \begin_layout Quote
28129 \begin_layout Standard
28134 should contain an explanation of why the command failed.
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28141 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28142 echo "LYXCMD:test:beginning-of-buffer:" >~/.lyxpipe.in
28143 \begin_inset Newline newline
28146 echo "LYXCMD:test:get-xy:" >~/.lyxpipe.in
28147 \begin_inset Newline newline
28150 read a <~/.lyxpipe.out
28151 \begin_inset Newline newline
28157 \begin_layout Subsection
28158 AppleScript (Mac OS X)
28161 \begin_layout Standard
28162 Since \SpecialChar LyX
28165 supports basic interactions with AppleScript for normal communication through the command run.
28166 This command takes a direct argument (the
28170 to perform) and an optional argument.
28171 It either returns the output of the function or triggers an error with the error message and code.
28174 \begin_layout Standard
28178 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28179 tell application "\SpecialChar LyX
28183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28188 -- Stores the current file name into f
28191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28192 set f to (run "server-get-filename" with argument "")
28195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28196 on error the error_message number the error_number
28199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28200 display dialog "Error:
28201 " & the error_number & ".
28205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28206 & the error_message buttons {"OK"} default button 1
28209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28213 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28217 \begin_layout Section
28221 \begin_layout Standard
28223 can notify clients of events going on asynchronously.
28224 Currently it will only do this if the user binds a key sequence with the function
28225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28233 The format of the string \SpecialChar LyX
28234 sends is as follows:
28237 \begin_layout Quote
28238 \begin_inset Flex Code
28241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28257 is the printed representation of the key sequence that was actually typed by the user.
28260 \begin_layout Standard
28261 This mechanism can be used to extend \SpecialChar LyX
28262 's command set and implement macros.
28263 Bind some key sequence to
28264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28272 Then start a client that listens on the output pipe,
28273 dispatches the command according to the sequence,
28274 and starts a function that may use \SpecialChar LyX
28275 calls and \SpecialChar LyX
28276 requests to issue a command or a series of commands to \SpecialChar LyX
28280 \begin_layout Section
28281 The simple \SpecialChar LyX
28285 \begin_layout Standard
28287 implements a simple protocol that can be used for session management.
28288 All messages are of the form
28291 \begin_layout Quote
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28331 is received from a client,
28333 will report back to inform the client that it's listening to it's messages,
28335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28342 sent from \SpecialChar LyX
28343 will inform clients that \SpecialChar LyX
28347 \begin_layout Section
28348 Reverse DVI/PDF search
28351 \begin_layout Standard
28352 Some DVI/PDF viewers
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 The following viewers offer the reverse PDF search feature:
28358 Okular on KDE/Linux,
28360 Skim on Mac OSX and SumatraPDF on Windows.
28369 facility (also called
28374 This means that you can tell \SpecialChar LyX
28375 to put the cursor to a specific line in the document by clicking at the respective position in the DVI/PDF output.
28377 the viewer must be able to communicate with \SpecialChar LyX
28379 This is done via the \SpecialChar LyX
28380 server either by using the named pipe (
28385 or the UNIX domain socket (
28389 ) that \SpecialChar LyX
28390 creates in its temporary directory (this is the way the
28391 \begin_inset Flex Code
28394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28400 program communicates with \SpecialChar LyX
28403 you need a helper script that mediates between the viewer and \SpecialChar LyX
28406 the viewer can communicate with \SpecialChar LyX
28408 This depends on the selected viewer and on your operating system.
28409 The same applies to the way viewers need to be configured and the way the reverse search is actually performed.
28411 we will thus describe how to setup reverse search for specific viewers.
28412 Before we turn to this,
28414 we will explain what needs to be done generally to enable reverse search in the DVI/PDF output.
28417 \begin_layout Subsection
28419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28421 name "subsec:rev-search"
28428 \begin_layout Standard
28429 In most cases \SpecialChar LyX
28430 will do the work for you by pressing the following button in the toolbar:
28434 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
28439 you can also enable the feature by checking
28441 Synchronize with Output
28444 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28456 In such a case \SpecialChar LyX
28457 will automatically insert the necessary Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28458 macro (for PDF) or load the srcltx package (for DVI) respectively.
28459 This option can be easily reached also on
28460 \begin_inset Flex Code
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28472 \begin_layout Standard
28473 If you need a different setting,
28474 you can select or input a custom macro from the drop down box just below
28475 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28480 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28481 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28482 Synchronize with Output
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 Note that the method
28492 \begin_inset Flex Code
28495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28503 enables gzip compression.
28504 If your viewer does not support it,
28505 you should instead use
28506 \begin_inset Flex Code
28509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28520 \begin_layout Standard
28521 Please also note that including the
28522 \begin_inset Flex Code
28525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28532 \begin_inset Flex Code
28535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 sometimes has an undesired impact on the typesetting.
28543 you should switch output synchronization off for the final typesetting if you use the
28544 \begin_inset Flex Code
28547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28554 \begin_inset Flex Code
28557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 \begin_layout Standard
28568 In case you need some more special settings that are not covered by the automatic settings,
28569 read the next section about how to set up output synchronization manually.
28570 If the automatic setup suits your needs,
28571 you can readily jump to section
28572 \begin_inset space ~
28576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28578 reference "subsec:configuring-viewers"
28584 where the necessary configuration steps in your viewer – needed both with the automatic and the manual setup – are described.
28587 \begin_layout Subsection
28591 \begin_layout Standard
28593 provides several different methods for reverse search.
28594 Some are built-in in the
28595 \begin_inset Flex Code
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 some are provided by external packages.
28606 Your choice depends on whether your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28607 distribution already provides a given method (the built-in methods are rather new) and whether your viewer can cope with it.
28608 The available methods are described in the following.
28611 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28612 Built-in DVI-search via src-specials (DVI only)
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28616 This method provides the DVI file with the necessary information for reverse search.
28617 It is available in \SpecialChar LaTeX
28618 since quite some time (any somewhat recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28619 distribution should include it),
28620 and it works reliably.
28623 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28651 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28655 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28656 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
28663 \begin_inset Flex Code
28666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28667 latex -src-specials $$i
28673 If this doesn't work,
28674 check if your \SpecialChar TeX
28675 engine needs different options (the syntax might differ in some distributions).
28678 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28679 External Packages (PDFSync and scrltx)
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28691 provide reverse search facility for PDF output (via pdflatex) and DVI output,
28693 In order to enable it,
28694 load the packages in the \SpecialChar LyX
28699 \begin_layout Itemize
28700 \begin_inset Flex Code
28703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28706 usepackage{pdfsync}
28711 for reverse PDF search,
28714 \begin_layout Itemize
28715 \begin_inset Flex Code
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28721 usepackage[active]{srcltx}
28726 for reverse DVI search.
28729 \begin_layout Standard
28730 If you want to be able to perform both DVI and PDF reverse searches,
28731 you can also insert in the preamble the following lines
28734 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28738 \begin_inset Newline newline
28744 \begin_inset Newline newline
28749 usepackage{pdfsync}
28750 \begin_inset Newline newline
28756 \begin_inset Newline newline
28761 usepackage[active]{srcltx}
28762 \begin_inset Newline newline
28770 \begin_layout Standard
28772 you can preview the file as either DVI or PDF (pdflatex) and the right package will be used.
28775 \begin_layout Standard
28776 Note that PDFSync might affect the output layout of your document.
28777 It is therefore advised to disable PDFsync for final documents.
28780 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28781 Built-in reverse search via Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28787 \begin_inset Flex Code
28790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28796 have built-in support for both PDF and DVI reverse search.
28799 Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28802 facility is basically the result of the integration of the PDFSync package to the pdftex program and its merge with the
28807 You need at least \SpecialChar TeX
28808 Live 2008 or a recent Mik\SpecialChar TeX
28809 distribution in order to use it.
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28815 Mik\SpecialChar TeX
28816 does not understand/obey the command \SpecialChar LyX
28817 inserts into the preamble when you check the "Enable Forward/Reverse Search" button in the toolbar and does not generate the necessary info.
28820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28821 The generation of the required info can be forced by changing the converter "\SpecialChar LaTeX
28822 (pdflatex) -> PDF (pdflatex)" in Preferences->File handling->Converters from the default "pdflatex $$i" to "pdflatex -synctex=1 $$i" (i.e.,
28823 by adding the -synctex=1 switch).
28828 Also note that only a few PDF viewers (such as Okular and Qpdfview on Unix,
28830 SumatraPDF on Windows;
28831 see the next section for details) already provide Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28835 \begin_layout Standard
28836 To enable Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28839 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28853 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28861 (plain) -> DraftDVI
28867 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28871 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28872 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
28879 \begin_inset Flex Code
28882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28883 latex -synctex=1 $$i
28889 and for PDF output,
28891 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28899 (pdflatex) -> PDF (pdflatex)
28905 \begin_inset Flex Code
28908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28909 pdflatex -synctex=1 $$i
28915 Should your viewer not be considered in the following description,
28916 or in case of missing success,
28917 please check the documentation of your viewer whether the viewer needs to be configured for the use with Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28923 Note that the option
28924 \begin_inset Flex Code
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28933 option enables gzip compression.
28934 If your viewer does not support it,
28935 you should instead use
28936 \begin_inset Flex Code
28939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28953 \begin_layout Subsection
28954 Configuring and using specific viewers
28955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28957 name "subsec:configuring-viewers"
28964 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28965 Xdvi (all platforms)
28968 \begin_layout Standard
28970 \begin_inset Flex Code
28973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28980 you don't need to do anything else for performing a reverse DVI search,
28981 as \SpecialChar LyX
28982 already provides the necessary hooks for automatically using the
28983 \begin_inset Flex Code
28986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28993 Just setup your document as described above (reverse search is triggered by Ctrl-click or Alt-click on Mac OSX,
28997 \begin_layout Standard
28999 if for whatever reason you want to use the named pipe instead of the socket for communicating with \SpecialChar LyX
29001 simply change the DVI viewer in
29002 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29006 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29007 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29018 On Mac OSX you have to use
29019 \begin_inset Flex Code
29022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29023 DISPLAY=:0.0 xdvi -editor "lyxeditor.sh %f %l"
29034 \begin_inset Flex Code
29037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29038 xdvi -editor "lyxeditor.sh %f %l"
29045 \begin_inset Flex Code
29048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29054 is a suitable script.
29056 a minimal shell script is the following one:
29059 \begin_layout LyX-Code
29061 \begin_inset Newline newline
29064 LYXPIPE="/path/to/lyxpipe"
29065 \begin_inset Newline newline
29068 COMMAND="LYXCMD:revdvi:server-goto-file-row:$1 $2"
29069 \begin_inset Newline newline
29072 echo "$COMMAND" > "${LYXPIPE}".in || exit
29073 \begin_inset Newline newline
29076 read TMP < "${LYXPIPE}".out || exit
29079 \begin_layout Standard
29081 \begin_inset Flex Code
29084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29090 is the LyXServer pipe path specified in
29091 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29095 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29107 \begin_inset Flex Code
29110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29116 folder of a source distribution you can find a
29117 \begin_inset Flex Code
29120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29126 script which is able to locate the
29130 based on your preferences.
29138 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29142 \begin_layout Standard
29144 \begin_inset Flex Code
29147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29148 /Applications/MacDviX_Folder/calleditor.script
29154 add the following lines:
29157 \begin_layout LyX-Code
29158 /Applications/LyX.app/Contents/MacOS/lyxeditor "$2" $1
29159 \begin_inset Newline newline
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29166 Modify the lines accordingly if you install \SpecialChar LyX
29167 somewhere else than in the Applications folder.
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 Reverse search is triggered by Alt-click (OPTION-click).
29174 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29178 \begin_layout Standard
29180 \begin_inset Flex Code
29183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29184 open -a Skim.app $$i
29189 to the viewer setting in
29190 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29194 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29195 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 File formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
29204 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29208 Skim\SpecialChar menuseparator
29209 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29216 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29225 preset and enter command
29226 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 /Applications/\SpecialChar LyX
29231 .app/Contents/MacOS/lyxeditor
29239 \begin_layout Standard
29240 Reverse search is triggered by COMMAND-SHIFT-click
29243 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29247 \begin_layout Standard
29248 Reverse search with evince does not work out of the box,
29249 but it can be achieved by means of some third party helper scripts.
29251 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29253 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/SyncTeX"
29261 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29265 \begin_layout Standard
29267 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29272 Configure Okular\SpecialChar menuseparator
29279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29283 This inserts the appropriate command (
29284 \begin_inset Flex Code
29287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29297 Reverse search is triggered by SHIFT-click.
29299 \change_inserted -712698321 1578211026
29300 Note that this only works if Okular is in
29301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29313 the hand symbol is clicked).
29318 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29322 \begin_layout Standard
29323 Qpdfview supports Sync\SpecialChar TeX
29324 since version 0.3.5.
29326 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29330 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29338 click on the input field of the
29339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29346 item and add the command
29347 \begin_inset Flex Code
29350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29360 Reverse search is triggered by double-click or,
29361 in more recent versions,
29365 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29372 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29376 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29382 menu and select the
29383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29395 New\SpecialChar ldots
29397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29401 in the window that opens,
29403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29411 (or any other name you like) in the
29412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29420 Now click on the button labeled
29421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29429 to open a file dialog and navigate to the directory containing the batch file
29430 \begin_inset Flex Code
29433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29441 \begin_inset Flex Code
29444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29450 and then specify the program arguments as
29451 \begin_inset Flex Code
29454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29462 \begin_inset Flex Code
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29471 wrapper is used for communicating with \SpecialChar LyX
29479 \begin_layout LyX-Code
29481 \begin_inset Newline newline
29484 echo LYXCMD:revdvi:server-goto-file-row:%~1 %2>
29493 \begin_inset Newline newline
29507 \begin_layout Standard
29508 Make sure that the \SpecialChar LyX
29509 Server pipe path you specified in \SpecialChar LyX
29511 \begin_inset Flex Code
29514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 otherwise change the
29530 \begin_inset Flex Code
29533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29539 wrapper accordingly.
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29544 reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29547 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29548 SumatraPDF (Windows)
29551 \begin_layout Standard
29552 In order to use SumatraPDF for inverse search,
29554 \begin_inset Flex Code
29557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29558 SumatraPDF -inverse-search "lyxeditor.bat "%f" %l"
29563 in the viewer setting in
29564 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29568 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29569 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29570 File formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
29578 \begin_inset Flex Code
29581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29587 is the previous wrapper.
29588 If SumatraPDF.exe is not in your command PATH,
29589 use its full file name.
29592 \begin_layout Standard
29593 Reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29596 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29600 \begin_layout Standard
29602 make sure that yap is your default DVI viewer in the Windows environment,
29605 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29609 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29615 menu and select the
29616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29628 New\SpecialChar ldots
29630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29634 in the window that opens,
29636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29644 (or any other name you like) in the
29645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29653 Now click on the button labeled
29654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29662 to open a file dialog and navigate to the directory containing the
29663 \begin_inset Flex Code
29666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29672 program (which is installed by default on Cygwin along with the \SpecialChar LyX
29675 \begin_inset Flex Code
29678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29684 and then specify the program arguments as
29685 \begin_inset Flex Code
29688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29696 you will be using the
29700 for communicating with \SpecialChar LyX
29703 for whatever reason,
29704 you want to use the
29710 \begin_inset Flex Code
29713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29719 option and be sure to specify the \SpecialChar LyX
29720 Server pipe path in the \SpecialChar LyX
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29726 reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29729 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29730 SumatraPDF (Cygwin)
29733 \begin_layout Standard
29734 In order to use SumatraPDF for inverse search,
29736 \begin_inset Flex Code
29739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29740 SumatraPDF -inverse-search "lyxeditor -g %f %l"
29745 in the viewer setting in
29746 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29750 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29751 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29752 File formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
29759 If SumatraPDF.exe is not in your command PATH,
29760 use its full posix path.
29762 \begin_inset Flex Code
29765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29771 enables communication via the
29778 \begin_inset Flex Code
29781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29787 option if you want to use the
29792 and be sure to specify the \SpecialChar LyX
29793 Server pipe path in the \SpecialChar LyX
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 Reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29801 \begin_layout Section
29805 \begin_layout Standard
29807 as the name implies,
29809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29817 It allows you to let the viewer jump to a given position from within \SpecialChar LyX
29819 If forward search is set up (as described in what follows),
29820 you can put the cursor anywhere in your \SpecialChar LyX
29823 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29827 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
29834 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29843 in the context menu via right mouse click),
29844 and then the viewer will jump to that position as well.
29847 that your viewer supports this function.
29850 \begin_layout Standard
29851 To make forward search possible,
29852 you first need to provide the generated output PDF/DVI file with additional information about the \SpecialChar TeX
29854 This can be done via the methods described in the section
29855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29857 reference "subsec:rev-search"
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29867 you need to configure \SpecialChar LyX
29868 for using your viewers in
29869 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29873 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29874 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29875 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29882 We provide a range of tested configurations for some viewers,
29883 which you can select from the drop down list.
29884 If none of these configurations suits you,
29885 you have to find out and enter a suitable configuration yourself.
29886 The definition syntax uses the following placeholders:
29889 \begin_layout Itemize
29891 \begin_inset Flex Code
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29904 \begin_layout Itemize
29906 \begin_inset Flex Code
29909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29916 name of the (temporary) exported .tex file (without path)
29919 \begin_layout Itemize
29921 \begin_inset Flex Code
29924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29931 name of the (temporary) exported .tex file (including path)
29934 \begin_layout Itemize
29936 \begin_inset Flex Code
29939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29946 name of the exported output file (either dvi or pdf,
29947 depending on which one exists in the temporary directory)
29950 \begin_layout Standard
29951 Note that only some of the viewers provide full and usable forward search functionality out of the box,
29958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29959 You might want to set
29960 \begin_inset Flex Code
29963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29970 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29974 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29975 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29976 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29978 \begin_inset space ~
29997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 SumatraPDF can also use DDE commands through the external program CMCDDE —
30000 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30002 target "http://www.istri.fr/spip/zip/CMCDDE.zip"
30018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30019 Forward search with evince can be achieved by means of third party helper scripts.
30021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30023 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/SyncTeX"
30034 require some extra tools in order to use forward search.
30035 While many of the widespread PDF viewers (most notably Adobe Reader) do not support forward search at all,
30036 some other viewers – e.
30037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30041 xpdf – allow at least to reload the document and jump to a specific page of the file,
30042 so you can at least navigate
30043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30051 This latter functionality is provided by an external call of synctex (see the predefined example configurations).
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30056 Forward search works both with DVI and PDF output.
30058 simply checks which preview format you have used before (i.
30059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30063 which format is already there in the temporary directory) and chooses the appropriate configuration for the respective format.
30064 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
30068 \begin_layout Standard
30070 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
30071 Special Document Classes
30074 \begin_layout Standard
30076 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30080 \begin_layout Standard
30082 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30090 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30096 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30097 This section describes how \SpecialChar LyX
30098 can be used to write articles for submission to the scientific journal
30100 Astronomy and Astrophysics
30103 \begin_inset Flex URL
30106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30108 https://www.aanda.org/
30113 ) using Version 5.01 of the document class
30118 This package can be downloaded from the ftp site
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30123 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30124 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30133 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30134 \begin_inset Flex URL
30137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30139 ftp://ftp.edpsciences.org/pub/aa/readme.html
30147 \begin_layout Standard
30149 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30150 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
30156 \begin_layout Standard
30158 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30159 A manual comes together with that package,
30160 and this text is not meant to replace the original manual but is merely a short guide in how to realize the correct form of your paper.
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30166 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30167 Please note that the publisher of the journal was changed from Springer to EDP Sciences starting January 1,
30169 That change involved also some slight changes to the style files,
30170 namely the removal of the thesaurus command.
30171 The \SpecialChar LyX
30172 class aa supports the newest version of these style files,
30174 If you have an older version installed,
30177 the old (version 4) layout has been kept as
30182 Please refer to the comments in
30185 Dir/layouts/aapaper.layout
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30192 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30198 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30199 It is recommended you start from the example template distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
30201 If you are not using a template,
30202 note the following settings:
30205 \begin_layout Itemize
30207 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30218 that one was obvious).
30221 \begin_layout Itemize
30223 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30224 Don't change the option
30227 \begin_inset space ~
30238 The whole layout is done by the macros,
30239 you shouldn't change anything.
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30244 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30250 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30251 First thing to enter is the header information.
30252 It consists of seven entries,
30253 of which some are optional.
30257 \begin_layout Itemize
30259 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30268 \begin_layout Itemize
30270 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30279 \begin_layout Itemize
30281 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30290 \begin_layout Itemize
30292 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30301 \begin_layout Itemize
30303 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30309 [optional] if more than one author:
30310 whom to contact for offprint requests.
30313 \begin_layout Itemize
30315 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30321 [optional] mail address for contacts.
30324 \begin_layout Itemize
30326 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30333 Suggested format is
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30342 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30343 There is no need to issue the
30350 this is done automatically by \SpecialChar LyX
30351 when the header is finished.
30352 Although the order of the single header entries doesn't matter it is advised to keep the above sequence,
30353 just to get the best optics and meets the layout of the real document.
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30358 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30359 If you want to place footnotes in the header block,
30361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30365 \begin_inset space \space{}
30368 to state your present address,
30369 just use the standard footnote via the menu
30371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30376 will automagically use the term
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30387 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30390 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30394 you'll find two insets which are relevant for the titling:
30397 \begin_layout Itemize
30399 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30406 to mark corresponding author\SpecialChar breakableslash
30408 The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
30413 so you have to put a marker to each author.
30416 \begin_layout Itemize
30418 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30423 to supply an email address for fast contact.
30426 \begin_layout Standard
30428 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30429 In addition to these topics,
30430 the macros use one additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
30431 command that has no counterpart in \SpecialChar LyX
30435 \begin_layout Itemize
30437 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30444 to separate different names for more than one author and institute,
30448 \begin_layout Standard
30450 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30451 The appropriate command has to be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30452 and marked as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30458 \begin_layout Standard
30460 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30466 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30467 The abstract should immediately follow the header block.
30468 With version 5 the abstract environment was changed to a command,
30469 and there is now a restriction to only one paragraph.
30471 it should contain an entry with the keywords.
30472 This is done via the paragraph style
30477 Refer to the example paper.
30480 \begin_layout Standard
30482 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30483 Supported environments
30486 \begin_layout Standard
30488 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30489 The A&A paper layout supports the following environments for structuring your text:
30492 \begin_layout Itemize
30494 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30500 \begin_layout Itemize
30502 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30508 \begin_layout Itemize
30510 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30516 \begin_layout Itemize
30518 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30524 \begin_layout Itemize
30526 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30532 \begin_layout Itemize
30534 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30540 \begin_layout Itemize
30542 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30548 \begin_layout Itemize
30550 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30556 \begin_layout Itemize
30558 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30564 \begin_layout Itemize
30566 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30572 \begin_layout Itemize
30574 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30580 \begin_layout Itemize
30582 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30591 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30592 Commands not supported by \SpecialChar LyX
30596 \begin_layout Standard
30598 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30599 Some commands are not yet supported by the
30603 layout for \SpecialChar LyX
30605 Some have already been mentioned.
30606 For the sake of completeness,
30607 they are listed all together here:
30610 \begin_layout Itemize
30612 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30620 \begin_layout Itemize
30622 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30630 \begin_layout Itemize
30632 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30640 \begin_layout Itemize
30642 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30652 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30653 If you want to use any of these commands,
30654 you have to enter them yourself.
30657 Do not forget to mark them as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30661 \begin_layout Standard
30663 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30664 Figure and Table Floats
30667 \begin_layout Standard
30669 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30671 provides support for the necessary float environments
30682 therefore we won't tell much about it here.
30686 \begin_inset space ~
30692 Just remember that tables should be left-aligned.
30694 select the table and change the alignment in
30696 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30698 \begin_inset space ~
30704 \begin_layout Standard
30706 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30707 There is only one special thing:
30708 the figures with caption besides the figure.
30709 To create such a figure,
30710 you have to do the following:
30713 \begin_layout Enumerate
30715 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30716 Create a wide figure float:
30719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30720 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
30724 then right click in the figure and select
30727 \begin_inset space ~
30735 \begin_layout Enumerate
30737 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30738 Enter your caption text.
30741 \begin_layout Enumerate
30743 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30748 to move the cursor above the caption.
30751 \begin_layout Enumerate
30753 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30757 \begin_layout Enumerate
30759 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30760 Position the cursor behind the figure and insert a horizontal fill:
30763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30765 \begin_inset space ~
30768 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
30770 \begin_inset space ~
30778 \begin_layout Enumerate
30780 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30781 Switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
30786 \begin_inset space ~
30794 \begin_layout Enumerate
30796 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30806 Do not close the brace!
30809 \begin_layout Enumerate
30811 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30812 Position the cursor behind the caption text,
30813 switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
30814 mode and insert the closing brace:
30818 \begin_inset space ~
30830 \begin_layout Standard
30832 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30834 refer to the figures in the example paper.
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30839 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30843 \begin_layout Standard
30845 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30847 the paper has to be formated in a special double-spacing layout.
30849 you have to give the option
30853 to the document class.
30854 This must be done using the custom class options field in the
30856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30860 Just enter the string
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30869 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30875 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30880 directory contains an example paper written with \SpecialChar LyX
30882 It is the example paper from the original macro package,
30883 translated to \SpecialChar LyX
30885 Use it for inspiration,
30886 and compare the original \SpecialChar LaTeX
30887 code with \SpecialChar LyX
30891 \begin_layout Standard
30893 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30897 \begin_layout Standard
30899 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30904 can be used to type letters according to German conventions.
30905 A template file is included in
30907 .../lyx/share/templates
30909 for you to use as a starting point.
30912 \begin_layout Standard
30914 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30918 \begin_layout Standard
30920 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30921 See the \SpecialChar LyX
30927 It contains all infos you need.
30930 \begin_layout Standard
30932 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30936 \begin_layout Standard
30938 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30941 Panayotis Papasotiriou
30944 \begin_layout Standard
30946 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30952 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30953 The ijmpc package is a set of macros that facilitates electronic manuscript submission to the
30955 International Journal of Modern Physics C
30959 the ijmpd package is for creating manuscripts to be submitted to the
30961 International Journal of Modern Physics D
30964 Both journals are published by World Scientific.
30965 The corresponding document classes are named
30976 together with instructions for the authors,
30977 can be downloaded from the sites
30978 \begin_inset Flex URL
30981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 http://www.worldscinet.com/ijmpc/mkt/guidelines.shtml
30989 \begin_inset Flex URL
30992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30994 http://www.worldscinet.com/ijmpd/mkt/guidelines.shtml
31000 Both packages are modified versions of the standard
31001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31009 and they are almost (but not exactly) identical.
31010 Most of their features are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31012 I have used \SpecialChar LyX
31013 successfully to write articles submitted to both journals without any problem.
31016 \begin_layout Standard
31018 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31022 \begin_layout Standard
31024 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31026 the easiest way to write a paper is to start with a template.
31029 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31046 This will give an (almost) empty document that includes the most common fields found in a manuscript.
31047 Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
31053 You should keep in mind the following remarks.
31056 \begin_layout Enumerate
31058 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31060 won't let you change the font size and the page style of the document,
31061 because such modifications are not allowed by both packages.
31064 \begin_layout Enumerate
31066 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31067 The language of the document should not be changed.
31068 Before previewing your paper,
31069 be sure that the babel package is not used.
31074 arg "dialog-show document"
31079 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31098 \begin_layout Enumerate
31100 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31109 style must be used to define keywords.
31112 \begin_layout Enumerate
31114 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31115 The ijmpc package provides a style named
31116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31119 Classification Codes
31120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31124 which can be used to define classification codes,
31125 such as PACS numbers.
31126 Note that this facility is not supported by the ijmpd package.
31129 \begin_layout Enumerate
31131 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31132 Several new environments are available:
31134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31259 Their use is more or less obvious.
31261 supports all these environments;
31262 it will use the proper label,
31264 and numbering scheme for each of them.
31267 \begin_layout Enumerate
31269 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31270 Both packages use basic citations;
31271 the natbib package should not be used.
31272 In \SpecialChar LyX
31274 citation references are shown as usual;
31276 citations are shown as superscripts.
31277 If you want to use a citation as normal text,
31284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31288 \begin_inset space \space{}
31292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31296 \begin_inset space \space{}
31306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31312 \begin_layout Enumerate
31314 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31323 section in both packages.
31324 To put acknowledgments,
31326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31336 \begin_layout Enumerate
31338 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31339 Appendices may be added to the paper,
31344 the Acknowledgments and
31350 provides a special environment,
31352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31359 which marks the beginning of the appendices.
31360 This environment should be left blank;
31361 it just sends a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31363 but nothing is really printed.
31364 In \SpecialChar LyX
31367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31374 is printed with blue letters,
31375 as a signal that all sections after that point are appendices.
31376 To write an appendix,
31378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31387 will number each appendix with capital letters,
31388 as required by both journals.
31390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31401 be present before the first appendix;
31403 all appendices will be numbered as normal sections in the output.
31406 \begin_layout Enumerate
31408 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31409 The ijmpc and the ijmpd packages use the
31413 command to implement table captions.
31415 a table created by \SpecialChar LyX
31416 is printed correctly,
31417 but its caption is ignored.
31419 you can use some \SpecialChar TeX
31420 code to overcome this problem,
31421 so that captions are printed as expected.
31423 create a float table as usual,
31424 remove the caption,
31425 and replace it with the \SpecialChar TeX
31437 you must also the \SpecialChar TeX
31442 immediately after the tabular material.
31443 Study the example table included in the template files to see how this trick is implemented.
31445 If you need table captions,
31446 you should implement the whole table float in a
31451 then include this file to the \SpecialChar LyX
31454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31455 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31457 \begin_inset space ~
31463 Details on how to create a table float can be found in the files
31472 included in the corresponding packages.
31475 \begin_layout Standard
31477 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31478 Preparing a paper for submission
31481 \begin_layout Standard
31483 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31484 Before you submit your paper you must export the \SpecialChar LyX
31485 document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31488 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31489 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
31497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31498 Actually you have the choice between \SpecialChar LaTeX
31499 (plain) and pdflatex.
31500 If you intend to use pdflatex to prepare the paper,
31501 you should use the pdflatex option so that included graphics are converted to PDF format,
31502 ready for use by pdflatex.
31508 then make the following changes to the resulting
31515 \begin_layout Enumerate
31517 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31518 Remove the comment lines before the
31527 \begin_layout Enumerate
31529 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31530 Remove everything between (and including) the
31543 except for any commands you specifically put into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31547 \begin_layout Standard
31549 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
31554 file should be saved and processed through \SpecialChar LaTeX
31555 as many times as necessary.
31556 You may also want to check the resulting
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31565 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31569 \begin_layout Standard
31571 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31579 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31583 \begin_layout Standard
31585 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31586 The iopart package provides a document class to create electronic manuscript submission to the journals published by the Institute of Physics.
31587 Instructions for the authors how to create a paper using the iopart class can be downloaded together with the iopart package from the site
31588 \begin_inset Flex URL
31591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 ftp://ftp.iop.org/pub/journals/latex2e
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31603 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31607 \begin_layout Standard
31609 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31610 The easiest way to write a paper is to start with the template
31614 that is available via
31616 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31619 The template explains how to use the special text environments.
31620 Here are the most important advices:
31623 \begin_layout Itemize
31625 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31626 To be able to compile your document to a PDF,
31629 ensure that the no AMS packages are loaded in
31631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31632 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31638 \begin_layout Itemize
31640 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31643 The title environment defines the kind of your paper.
31644 So use one of the following environments for the title:
31648 \begin_layout Itemize
31650 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31659 \begin_layout Itemize
31661 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31670 \begin_layout Itemize
31672 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31678 for a Topical review
31681 \begin_layout Itemize
31683 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31692 \begin_layout Itemize
31694 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31703 \begin_layout Itemize
31705 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31711 for a Paper (same as Title)
31714 \begin_layout Itemize
31716 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31722 for a Preliminary communication
31725 \begin_layout Itemize
31727 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31733 for a Rapid communication
31736 \begin_layout Itemize
31738 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31744 for a Letter to the editor
31748 \begin_layout Itemize
31750 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31753 All title environments except of
31757 can have an optional short title.
31760 \begin_layout Itemize
31762 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31763 There is a general title environment
31767 which is not directly supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31769 This can be used as \SpecialChar TeX
31770 code when your document doesn't fit into one of the other title types.
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31775 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
31776 For more informations like hints for special table and formula formatting,
31777 look at the IOP author guidelines.
31780 \begin_layout Standard
31782 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31788 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31791 Panayotis Papasotiriou
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31796 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31800 \begin_layout Standard
31802 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31803 The Kluwer package is a set of macros produced by Kluwer Academic Publishers that facilitates electronic manuscript submission to the journals they publish.
31804 Most known of them (at least in my domain of interest) are
31806 Astrophysics and Space Science
31813 but there are many others (see a complete list at
31814 \begin_inset Flex URL
31817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31819 http://www.wkap.nl/jrnllist.htm/JRNLHOME
31825 The Kluwer package may be downloaded from the site
31826 \begin_inset Flex URL
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 http://www.wkap.nl/kaphtml.htm/STYLEFILES
31837 A complete user guide is contained in that package (but it can also be downloaded separately).
31840 \begin_layout Standard
31842 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31844 supports many features of the package but not everything.
31846 the \SpecialChar TeX
31847 code needed is reduced to some
31848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31855 commands of the package (see
31856 \begin_inset space ~
31860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31862 reference "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
31868 I have recently used \SpecialChar LyX
31869 to write an article submitted to the
31871 Astrophysics and Space Science
31873 without any problem.
31876 \begin_layout Standard
31878 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31884 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31885 The easiest way to write a paper is to start with the Kluwer template file.
31888 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31901 This will give an (almost) empty document that includes the most common fields found in a manuscript and a short description of their use.
31902 As in most templates,
31903 simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
31908 ) with the correct information.
31911 \begin_layout Standard
31913 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31914 Preparing a paper for submission
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31919 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31920 As in the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
31922 before you submit your paper to a journal you must
31923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31933 \begin_layout Enumerate
31935 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31936 Export your paper as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31942 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
31950 \begin_layout Enumerate
31952 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31957 file with a text editor and make the following changes
31961 \begin_layout Enumerate
31963 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31964 remove the comment lines before the
31973 \begin_layout Enumerate
31975 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31976 remove everything between (and including) the
31989 except for any commands you specifically put into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31993 \begin_layout Standard
31995 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32004 \begin_layout Enumerate
32006 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32011 file through \SpecialChar LaTeX
32012 as many times as necessary (usually up to three).
32015 \begin_layout Enumerate
32017 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32028 \begin_inset space \space{}
32036 and check if everything is OK (it should,
32037 if you didn't make any mistake).
32040 \begin_layout Standard
32042 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32050 of the Kluwer package
32051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32053 name "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
32060 \begin_layout Standard
32062 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32063 The Kluwer package has the following
32064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32074 \begin_layout Enumerate
32076 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32077 It is possible to write multiple articles in the same \SpecialChar LaTeX
32082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32083 I can't imagine any good reason to do this.
32089 Each article must be included in the environment
32090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32099 this environment cannot be omitted,
32100 even if you write just one article.
32102 each article starts with the command
32110 ends with the command
32117 Although this can be implemented in \SpecialChar LyX
32119 I didn't included it,
32120 since it looks ugly and can confuse the novice user.
32122 you need to enter them directly and mark them as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32123 code (the well-known
32124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32135 \begin_layout Enumerate
32137 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32138 Information given at the beginning of the article (i.
32139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32143 \begin_inset space \space{}
32152 abstract and keywords) must be included in an environment called
32153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32161 This is not implemented in \SpecialChar LyX
32163 so you must enter title,
32165 \begin_inset space ~
32168 between two \SpecialChar TeX
32184 \begin_layout Enumerate
32186 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32187 According to the user manual,
32188 the label of each bibliography item must be written as
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32213 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32218 template takes care of all these
32219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32227 If you start a new paper using this template you don't need to do anything special.
32231 \begin_layout Enumerate
32233 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32234 don't delete the \SpecialChar TeX
32235 code included in the template,
32239 \begin_layout Enumerate
32241 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
32242 copy the example bibliography item included in the template and modify it as necessary to enter new bibliography items.
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32247 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32251 \begin_layout Standard
32253 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32258 provides an alternative to the standard
32263 It provides similar functionality,
32264 but you might prefer this layout with sans serif sections,
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32271 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32272 Springer Journals (
32279 \begin_layout Standard
32281 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32287 \begin_layout Standard
32289 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32295 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32296 These are the layout files for some of the journal formats used by Springer Verlag and listed on
32297 \begin_inset Flex URL
32300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32302 http://www.springer.de/author/tex/help-journals.html
32308 where you should also go to fetch the class files (yes,
32309 these are \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
32311 It is a modular system:
32312 the things common to all journals are implemented in
32317 which journal-specific layout files (such as,
32319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32323 \begin_inset space \space{}
32330 for Journal of Geodesy) can include.
32333 \begin_layout Standard
32335 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32336 This means that implementing support for any other Springer journal on this list is as simple as writing your own
32344 file following the outline given in
32352 \begin_layout Standard
32354 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32355 It is reasonably well tested only for the Journal of Geodesy.
32364 come with the standard \SpecialChar LyX
32366 Install the relevant class file (downloaded from Springer) in a proper directory,
32367 reconfigure \SpecialChar LaTeX
32368 (in the te\SpecialChar TeX
32374 as root if necessary —
32375 doesn't \SpecialChar LyX
32376 take care of this?),
32377 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
32378 and it should work.
32381 \begin_layout Standard
32383 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32389 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32390 A large number of theorem-like styles —
32405 \begin_layout Standard
32407 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32413 Running_\SpecialChar LaTeX
32424 See the Springer class file documentation for details.
32427 \begin_layout Standard
32429 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32433 \begin_layout Itemize
32435 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32449 \begin_layout Itemize
32451 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32454 Probability Theory and Related Fields
32462 Jean-Marc Lasgouttes
32465 \begin_layout Standard
32467 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32474 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32478 \begin_layout Standard
32480 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32481 These files are partly based on the older
32486 which was again based on a tinkered-with version of an old \SpecialChar LaTeX
32487 2.09 style file from Springer.
32495 Jean-Marc Lasgouttes helped out big in making me find my way around the \SpecialChar LyX
32496 layout file mechanism.
32499 \begin_layout Standard
32501 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32505 \begin_layout Standard
32507 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32509 But probably less than in the old hacked-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32517 \begin_layout Chapter
32519 Features needing Extra Software
32522 \begin_layout Section
32523 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
32527 \begin_layout Standard
32533 \begin_layout Subsection
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32551 is not yet available when you are using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32552 distribution MiK\SpecialChar TeX
32567 \begin_inset space ~
32578 \begin_inset Newline newline
32582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32584 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/chktex.html"
32592 \begin_layout Standard
32595 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32598 package is a program that was written by
32599 \begin_inset Flex Noun
32602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32604 \begin_inset space ~
32612 in frustration because some constructs in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32613 are sometimes non-intuitive,
32614 and easy to forget.
32615 The program runs over your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32617 checks the integrity of the file,
32618 and flags some common errors.
32619 In other technical words,
32624 for \SpecialChar LaTeX
32628 \begin_layout Standard
32630 what is a syntax checker doing in \SpecialChar LyX
32631 which is supposed to produce correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
32633 The answer is simple:
32638 not only checks the
32647 checks for type-errors,
32650 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32653 catches some common
32658 in addition to the syntactical ones.
32662 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32665 is capable of detecting several common errors,
32669 \begin_layout Itemize
32670 Ellipsis detection:
32671 \begin_inset Newline newline
32674 Use \SpecialChar ldots
32678 \begin_layout Itemize
32679 No space in front of/after parenthesis:
32680 \begin_inset Newline newline
32686 \begin_layout Itemize
32687 Enforcement of normal space after common abbreviations:
32688 \begin_inset Newline newline
32692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32696 \begin_inset space \space{}
32699 is too wide spacing.
32702 \begin_layout Itemize
32703 Enforcement of end-of-sentence space when the last sentence ends with a capital letter:
32704 \begin_inset Newline newline
32708 And this is wrong spacing.
32711 \begin_layout Itemize
32712 Space in front of labels and similar commands:
32713 \begin_inset Newline newline
32716 The label should stick right up to the text to avoid falling to a wrong page.
32718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32729 This footnote is in danger of falling off to a wrong page
32734 The label is separated too much.
32737 \begin_layout Itemize
32738 Space in front of references,
32739 instead of hard spaces:
32740 \begin_inset Newline newline
32743 If you have bad luck,
32744 the text will break right between the referenced text and reference number,
32747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32749 reference "sec:chktex"
32757 \begin_layout Itemize
32759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32767 \begin_inset Formula $\times$
32771 \begin_inset Newline newline
32774 2x2 looks cheap compared to
32775 \begin_inset Formula $2\times2$
32781 \begin_layout Standard
32782 and more \SpecialChar ldots
32783 It is an invaluable tool when you are
32784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32791 your document before printing,
32792 and you should run it right after the obligatory spelling check,
32793 and before you go fine tuning the typesetting.
32796 \begin_layout Subsection
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32801 If you have the program installed,
32802 usage is as simple as choosing
32804 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32812 This will make \SpecialChar LyX
32813 generate a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32814 file of your document,
32817 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32821 and then make \SpecialChar LyX
32823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32830 with the warnings from
32832 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32837 The warnings will be placed close to the point of the mistake,
32838 and you can quickly find them by using the
32840 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
32844 or the shortcut key
32853 Open the error boxes by clicking on them with the mouse,
32854 or use the shortcut key
32863 or the corresponding
32872 Read the warning and correct the mistake,
32873 if it is a mistake.
32874 If you have trouble understanding what the warning is about,
32875 you can safely ignore it.
32876 Remember that there is a hidden layer between the document on screen and the technical details in invoking
32878 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32882 and this gap can make some warnings seem arcane or just plain silly.
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32886 This document is an excellent testing bed for the feature,
32887 and it should provide quite a few warnings for you to fiddle with.
32888 Since computers are only so smart,
32889 expect most of the warnings to be false alarms,
32893 \begin_layout Subsection
32894 How to fine tune it
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32901 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32904 makes more noise than suits your mood.
32905 Then you can choose not to use it,
32906 wait until your mood changes,
32907 or try to customize
32909 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32912 to get better along with you.
32915 \begin_layout Standard
32918 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32925 very configurable and extensible,
32926 you should not expect to solve all problems with
32928 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32931 in \SpecialChar LyX
32933 Since \SpecialChar LyX
32934 has to generate a somewhat special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32935 file to be able to match the line numbers from the
32937 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32945 You can inspect the specific output from
32951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32954 \begin_inset space ~
32968 to the internal document structure,
32969 some of the warnings will not appear correctly.
32970 There are two things you can do about this:
32973 \begin_layout Itemize
32976 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32979 invocation command line in
32980 \begin_inset Flex Noun
32983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32984 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32985 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32986 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32987 LaTeX\SpecialChar menuseparator
32996 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32999 installation configuration file (usually with the file
33004 See below to learn what warnings can be enabled and disabled on the command line.
33007 \begin_layout Itemize
33008 Export your document as a raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
33011 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
33012 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
33021 Invoked in this way,
33022 it can be a hassle to find the corresponding place in the document inside \SpecialChar LyX
33024 but with a little patience,
33025 you should be able to do it.
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33029 Here follows the warning messages that can be enabled and disabled in
33038 to disable a warning,
33043 to enable a warning.
33044 The emphasized entries are disabled by default,
33045 because the default is "
33047 chktex -n1 -n3 -n6 -n9 -n22 -n25 -n30 -n38
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33053 Notice that you should only use the options that enable and disable warnings,
33054 because \SpecialChar LyX
33055 relies on some of the other command line parameters to be set in a specific way to have a chance to communicate with
33062 \begin_layout Enumerate
33066 Command terminated with space.
33069 \begin_layout Enumerate
33072 Non-breaking space (
33073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33084 ) should have been used.
33087 \begin_layout Enumerate
33091 You should enclose the previous parenthesis with
33092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33106 \begin_layout Enumerate
33109 Italic correction (
33110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33123 ) found in non-italic buffer.
33126 \begin_layout Enumerate
33129 Italic correction (
33130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33143 ) found more than once.
33146 \begin_layout Enumerate
33150 No italic correction (
33151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33167 \begin_layout Enumerate
33171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33197 \begin_layout Enumerate
33200 Wrong length of dash may have been used.
33203 \begin_layout Enumerate
33207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33234 \begin_layout Enumerate
33238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33252 \begin_layout Enumerate
33256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33267 to achieve an ellipsis.
33270 \begin_layout Enumerate
33273 Inter-word spacing (
33274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33287 ) should perhaps be used.
33290 \begin_layout Enumerate
33293 Inter-sentence spacing (
33294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33307 ) should perhaps be used.
33310 \begin_layout Enumerate
33313 Could not find argument for command.
33316 \begin_layout Enumerate
33320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33334 \begin_layout Enumerate
33337 Math mode still on at end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33341 \begin_layout Enumerate
33345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33356 doesn't match the number of
33357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33371 \begin_layout Enumerate
33374 You should use either
33377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33390 as an alternative to
33391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33405 \begin_layout Enumerate
33412 " (ASCII 39) instead of "
33419 \begin_layout Enumerate
33422 User-specified pattern found.
33425 \begin_layout Enumerate
33428 This command might not be intended.
33431 \begin_layout Enumerate
33438 \begin_layout Enumerate
33456 \begin_layout Enumerate
33459 Delete this space to maintain correct page references.
33462 \begin_layout Enumerate
33466 You might wish to put this between a pair of
33467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33481 \begin_layout Enumerate
33484 You ought to remove spaces in front of punctuation.
33487 \begin_layout Enumerate
33490 Could not execute \SpecialChar LaTeX
33494 \begin_layout Enumerate
33503 in front of small punctuation.
33506 \begin_layout Enumerate
33514 may look prettier here.
33517 \begin_layout Enumerate
33521 Multiple spaces detected in output.
33524 \begin_layout Enumerate
33527 This text may be ignored.
33530 \begin_layout Enumerate
33536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33541 to begin quotation,
33549 \begin_layout Enumerate
33560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33568 \begin_layout Enumerate
33574 \begin_layout Enumerate
33577 You should perhaps use
33578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33592 \begin_layout Enumerate
33595 You should put a space in front of/after parenthesis.
33598 \begin_layout Enumerate
33601 You should avoid spaces in front of/after parenthesis.
33604 \begin_layout Enumerate
33608 You should not use punctuation in front of/after quotes.
33611 \begin_layout Enumerate
33614 Double space found.
33617 \begin_layout Enumerate
33620 You should put punctuation outside inner/inside display math mode.
33623 \begin_layout Enumerate
33626 You ought to not use primitive \SpecialChar TeX
33627 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
33631 \begin_layout Enumerate
33634 You should remove spaces in front of
33635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33649 \begin_layout Enumerate
33652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33663 is normally not followed by
33664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 In later versions of \SpecialChar LyX
33681 we hope to provide a more complete interface to this tool (and it's smaller cousin
33685 ) to exploit the full power of it.
33686 But it's not exactly useless as it is now:
33687 go try it on one of your existing documents of a certain length and be surprised.
33690 \begin_layout Section
33691 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
33695 \begin_layout Standard
33698 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
33705 \begin_layout Subsection
33709 \begin_layout Standard
33711 supports some of the most basic RCS/CVS/SVN/GIT commands.
33712 If you need something a bit more sophisticated you will have to do that manually in a terminal.
33715 \begin_layout Standard
33716 Also note that CVS support is not as good as subversion support,
33717 so we advise using SVN instead.
33718 A good place to start learning Subversion is the SVN Book
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33725 target "http://svnbook.red-bean.com/"
33736 In the case of RCS you should read
33737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33750 This file describes all the basic features of RCS.
33751 You should especially notice the comment about a RCS directory,
33752 and the notion of a master RCS file (the file ending in
33759 \begin_layout Standard
33760 Before you begin to use the version control features in \SpecialChar LyX
33762 you should be familiar with RCS/CVS/SVN/GIT usage.
33763 The implementation in \SpecialChar LyX
33764 assumes a recent version of the GNU RCS or CVS/SVN package —
33765 no guarantees are made for older versions.
33766 Most of the log messages are not currently displayed after operations —
33767 you can check them in the Messages pane if you are unsure.
33768 Regular users of version control will appreciate the VC toolbar,
33769 which can be enabled via
33771 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 Toolbars\SpecialChar menuseparator
33774 \begin_inset space ~
33782 \begin_layout Standard
33783 For introducing your own external commands consult
33784 \begin_inset Flex Code
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33801 \begin_layout Standard
33802 It is strongly recommended to store documents in uncompressed format if using version control (uncheck
33804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33808 Uncompressed LyX documents are text files and therefore for merging two different versions by version control systems.
33809 Compressed LyX documents are binary files,
33810 which cannot be merged by version control systems.
33813 \begin_layout Subsection
33814 RCS commands in \SpecialChar LyX
33818 \begin_layout Standard
33819 The following sections describe the RCS commands supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33821 You can find them in the
33823 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
33825 \begin_inset space ~
33832 was tested against RCS 5.7/5.8.
33835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33841 \begin_layout Standard
33842 If your document is not under revision control,
33843 this is the only item shown in the menu.
33844 And if it is under revision control,
33849 item is not visible.
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33854 This command registers your document with RCS (unless you are under the directory managed by CVS)\SpecialChar endofsentence
33855 You are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
33856 The document is now set in Read-Only mode and you have to
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33863 \begin_inset space ~
33867 \begin_inset space ~
33873 before making any changes to it.
33874 A document under revision control has a
33875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33878 [RCS:<version> <locker>]
33879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33882 item tagged to the filename in the minibuffer.
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33886 RCS command that is run:
33889 \begin_layout LyX-Code
33892 ci -q -u -i -t-"<initial description>" <file-name>
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33900 to understand the switches.
33904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33910 \begin_layout Standard
33911 When you are finished editing a file,
33912 you check in your changes.
33914 you are asked for a description of the changes.
33915 This is stored in the history log.
33916 The version number is bumped,
33917 your changes are applied to the master RCS file,
33918 the document is unlocked and set to Read-Only mode.
33921 \begin_layout Itemize
33925 ci -q -u -m"<description>" <file-name>
33928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33934 \begin_layout Standard
33935 By doing this you lock the document so that only you can edit it.
33936 This will also make the document Read-Write only for you.
33937 You will usually continue editing for a while and when you are finished you check in your changes.
33938 The status line is changed to reflect that you have locked the file.
33941 \begin_layout Itemize
33945 co -q -l <file-name>
33948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33951 Revert To Repository Version
33954 \begin_layout Standard
33955 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
33956 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
33959 \begin_layout Itemize
33963 co -f -u<version> <file-name>
33966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33972 \begin_layout Standard
33973 This will create a copy of the current document.
33974 Since RCS does not support copy operations natively,
33975 the version history is not preserved,
33976 and the copy is added as a new file.
33977 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
33978 You are asked for a file name and a description of the copy operation.
33979 After that the copy is created,
33980 both locally and in the repository.
33981 If the parent directories of the copied and original document differ,
33982 all relative paths of included files of the copy are adjusted (like in
33984 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
33990 the copy is loaded instead of the original document.
33993 \begin_layout Labeling
33994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33996 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_inset Newline newline
34009 \begin_inset Flex Code
34012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34015 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34019 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34028 \begin_inset Flex Code
34031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34034 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34038 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34047 \begin_inset Newline newline
34051 \begin_inset Flex Code
34054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34058 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34062 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34079 \begin_layout Standard
34080 This makes as if the last check in never happened.
34081 No changes are made to the document loaded into \SpecialChar LyX
34083 but the last version is removed from the master RCS file.
34086 \begin_layout Itemize
34090 rcs -o<version> <file-name>
34093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34099 \begin_layout Standard
34100 This shows the complete history of the RCS document.
34105 is shown in a browser.
34113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34117 \begin_layout Standard
34119 supports RCS version number,
34121 date and time of last commit.
34122 All those are extracted from
34124 rlog -r <file-name>
34128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34130 reference "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
34138 \begin_layout Subsection
34139 CVS commands in \SpecialChar LyX
34143 \begin_layout Standard
34144 A subset of CVS operations is supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34146 You can find the commands in the
34148 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34156 The version control system SVN is more powerful,
34157 so please use it instead of CVS if possible.
34160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 If you start from scratch with CVS you have to create your repository and checkout the working copy with external tools.
34168 If you're using a client-server setup you may need to login before doing the first repository checkout.
34171 \begin_layout Standard
34172 If your documents are under revision control and others are using the same repository problems arise when different changes to the same document at the same location happen.
34173 Standard CVS repositories don't operate with a file locking mechanism.
34174 This may be surprising,
34175 but conflicts only occur if people disagree on the proper content of the same part of a document.
34177 if co-workers are used to communicate regularly,
34178 these conflicts occur rarely.
34179 If they don't communicate they have a fundamental problem anyway.
34180 Nevertheless some people like to work with so called
34181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34189 If they do so the working copy of all files is readonly when checked out first and the user starts editing after using a special command to make the working copy writable.
34190 When the changes are checked in the working copy returns to readonly state.
34191 With \SpecialChar LyX
34192 one has to edit the
34193 \begin_inset Flex Code
34196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34202 file and add the line
34203 \begin_inset Flex Code
34206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34212 to work with reserved checkouts.
34213 The benefit is the possibility to see who is using a writable copy of some document.
34214 It's not guaranteed only one user makes a copy writable.
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34219 tries to guess if you're using reserved or non-reserved checkouts.
34220 If your working copy is readonly or it is writable and an additional copy of your document exists in the CVS/Base sub-directory a reserved otherwise a non-reserved checkout is assumed.
34221 When a reserved checkout is detected you have to use
34222 \begin_inset Flex Noun
34225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34231 to make your working copy writable if it's readonly.
34233 \begin_inset Flex Noun
34236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34242 operation is possible and that makes your working copy readonly again after transferring your changes to the repository.
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34246 More information about CVS can be found here
34247 \begin_inset Flex URL
34250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34252 http://www.nongnu.org/cvs
34258 \begin_inset Flex URL
34261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34263 http://ximbiot.com/cvs
34271 \begin_layout Standard
34276 to understand the sub-commands and the switches mentioned below.
34279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34285 \begin_layout Standard
34286 If your document is not under revision control,
34287 this is the only item shown in the menu.
34288 And if it is under revision control,
34293 item is not visible.
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34298 This command registers in CVS your document
34299 \begin_inset Flex Strong
34302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34310 in the case you have already the documents directory under CVS control (in particular
34315 This means you have to create or checkout the archive by yourself using external tools.
34316 (In case you forget that step \SpecialChar LyX
34317 registers the document with RCS.)
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34321 Then you are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
34322 Don't forget that registered file is not yet checked in.
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34326 CVS command that is run:
34329 cvs -q add -m"<entered message>" "<file-name>"
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34337 above and for all other CVS commands is an abbreviation for
34338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34341 change the current working directory to file location and use the file name without path component as argument
34342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34355 When you are finished editing a file,
34356 you commit your changes.
34357 When you do this and you had changed the document,
34358 you are asked for a description of the changes.
34359 After that changes are written to the repository.
34360 In case you didn't change the document and a reserved checkout is detected the reservation made on
34361 \begin_inset Flex Noun
34364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 \begin_layout Labeling
34374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34376 \begin_inset space ~
34381 \begin_inset space ~
34385 \begin_inset Newline newline
34389 \begin_inset Flex Code
34392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34395 -q commit -m"<description>" "<file-name>"
34401 \begin_inset Newline newline
34405 \begin_inset Flex Code
34408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 When you are sharing a repository with others,
34427 you may have to incorporate their changes into your working copy.
34430 \begin_layout Standard
34434 cvs -q update "<file-name>"
34437 \begin_layout Standard
34438 If a readonly checkout is detected the working copy is made writable and reserved.
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34445 cvs -q edit "<file-name>"
34448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34451 Revert To Repository Version
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
34456 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
34457 Firstly the file is deleted,
34458 secondly CVS update command is run.
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34465 cvs -q update "<file-name>"
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 If a reserved checkout is detected and the working copy has no changes only the reservation is undone.
34472 \begin_layout Standard
34476 cvs -q unedit "<file-name>"
34479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34485 \begin_layout Standard
34486 This will create a copy of the current document.
34487 Since CVS does not support copy operations natively,
34488 the version history is not preserved,
34489 and the copy is added as a new file.
34490 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
34491 You are asked for a file name and a description of the copy operation.
34492 After that the copy is created,
34493 both locally and in the repository.
34494 If the parent directories of the copied and original document differ,
34495 all relative paths of included files of the copy are adjusted (like in
34497 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34503 the copy is loaded instead of the original document.
34506 \begin_layout Labeling
34507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34509 \begin_inset space ~
34514 \begin_inset space ~
34518 \begin_inset Newline newline
34522 \begin_inset Flex Code
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34532 \begin_inset Flex Code
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 \begin_inset Newline newline
34546 \begin_inset Flex Code
34549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34550 cvs -q add "<new-file-name>"
34558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34564 \begin_layout Standard
34565 This will rename the current document.
34566 Since CVS does not support rename operations natively,
34567 the version history is not preserved,
34568 the renamed document is added as a new file,
34569 and the original document is deleted.
34570 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
34571 You are asked for a file name and a description of the rename operation.
34572 After that the document is renamed,
34573 both locally and in the repository.
34574 If the parent directories of the new and old file names differ,
34575 all relative paths of included files are adjusted (like in
34577 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34583 the document is reloaded using the new name.
34586 \begin_layout Labeling
34587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34589 \begin_inset space ~
34594 \begin_inset space ~
34598 \begin_inset Newline newline
34602 \begin_inset Flex Code
34605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34612 \begin_inset Flex Code
34615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34622 \begin_inset Newline newline
34626 \begin_inset Flex Code
34629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34630 cvs -q add "<new-file-name>"
34636 \begin_inset Newline newline
34640 \begin_inset Flex Code
34643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34644 cvs -q remove "<file-name>"
34652 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34653 Update of the local directory checkout from repository
34656 \begin_layout Standard
34657 Once your documents gets more complex,
34658 containing sub-documents and pictures,
34660 \begin_inset Flex Code
34663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34669 files and so on using version control becomes more complicated.
34671 supports updating the whole tree in which resides the document.
34672 This become especially useful once you cooperate with people which neither have detailed knowledge about CVS usage nor they have ambition to commit additional material to the repository.
34673 You have to organize the files structure so that all external files are in the same directory or subdirectories of the document.
34674 It's good practice anyway to store multipart documents in an extra directory.
34677 \begin_layout Standard
34679 \begin_inset Flex Code
34682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34683 Update local directory from repository
34688 command updates the whole directory.
34689 If local changes are detected user is warned before update starts.
34690 In case of merge conflicts both versions of the conflicting document parts are placed in the final document.
34691 You have to review and correct the result of the merge.
34692 You'll find the conflicts enclosed in pairs of
34693 \begin_inset Flex Code
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34703 \begin_inset Flex Code
34706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34713 \begin_inset Flex Code
34716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34723 The first part is your version as before the update operation with the document name prepended.
34724 The second one is the repository version with the version number after the sequence of
34725 \begin_inset Flex Code
34728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34737 \begin_layout Labeling
34738 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34740 \begin_inset space ~
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34749 \begin_inset Newline newline
34753 \begin_inset Flex Code
34756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 (Ask if changes are detected.)
34766 \begin_inset Newline newline
34770 \begin_inset Flex Code
34773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34787 \begin_inset Flex Code
34790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34796 stands for the path to the document.
34799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34805 \begin_layout Standard
34806 This shows the complete history of the CVS document.
34809 cvs log "<file-name>"
34811 is shown in a browser.
34814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34818 \begin_layout Standard
34820 supports CVS version number,
34822 date and time of last commit.
34823 All those are extracted from
34825 cvs log -r <file-name>
34829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34831 reference "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
34839 \begin_layout Subsection
34840 SVN commands in \SpecialChar LyX
34844 \begin_layout Standard
34845 SVN is now partially supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34847 You can find the commands in the
34849 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34857 Please note that if you use password protected access to repository via ssh,
34858 you will be asked in terminal window.
34860 was tested against SVN 1.5,
34866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34867 Most of the commands will work with 1.4 too,
34869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34871 reference "subsec:SVN-Repo-Update"
34877 There seems to be currently unresolved permissions problem under SVN 1.8 with reverting changes when file is locked.
34885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34891 \begin_layout Standard
34892 If your document is not under revision control,
34893 this is the only item shown in the menu.
34894 And if it is under revision control,
34899 item is not visible.
34902 \begin_layout Standard
34903 This command registers in SVN your document ONLY in case you have already the documents directory under SVN control (in particular
34908 This means you have to checkout the archive by yourself.
34911 \begin_layout Standard
34912 Then you are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
34913 Don't forget that registered file is not yet commited.
34916 \begin_layout Standard
34917 SVN command that is run:
34921 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34925 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34931 \begin_layout Standard
34936 to understand the switches.
34939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34945 \begin_layout Standard
34946 When you are finished editing a file,
34947 you commit your changes.
34949 you are asked for a description of the changes.
34950 After that changes are commited.
34953 \begin_layout Standard
34958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34959 In case locking is not enabled.
34961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34963 reference "subsec:SVN-File-Locking"
34975 svn commit -q -m"<description>" <file-name>
34978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34984 \begin_layout Standard
34985 Updates the changes of this file from the repository.
34986 Be sure you understand SVN merging and conflicts resolving before using this function,
34987 because all conflicts has to be resolved manually by you!
34990 \begin_layout Standard
34995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35003 svn update --non-interactive
35004 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35008 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35017 Revert To Repository Version
35020 \begin_layout Standard
35021 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
35022 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
35025 \begin_layout Standard
35030 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35034 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35046 \begin_layout Standard
35047 This will create a copy of the current document including the version history.
35048 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
35049 You are asked for a file name and a description of the copy operation.
35050 After that the copy is created,
35051 both locally and in the repository.
35052 If the parent directories of the copied and original document differ,
35053 all relative paths of included files of the copy are adjusted (like in
35055 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35061 the copy is loaded instead of the original document.
35064 \begin_layout Labeling
35065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35072 \begin_inset space ~
35076 \begin_inset Newline newline
35080 \begin_inset Flex Code
35083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35087 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35091 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35095 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35099 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35108 \begin_inset Newline newline
35112 \begin_inset Flex Code
35115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35130 \begin_layout Standard
35131 This will rename the current document including the version history.
35132 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
35133 You are asked for a file name and a description of the rename operation.
35134 After that the document is renamed,
35135 both locally and in the repository.
35136 If the parent directories of the new and old file names differ,
35137 all relative paths of included files are adjusted (like in
35139 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35145 the document is reloaded using the new name.
35148 \begin_layout Labeling
35149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35156 \begin_inset space ~
35160 \begin_inset Newline newline
35164 \begin_inset Flex Code
35167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35171 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35175 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35179 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35183 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35192 \begin_inset Newline newline
35196 \begin_inset Flex Code
35199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35211 name "subsec:SVN-Repo-Update"
35215 Update of the local directory checkout from repository
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35220 Note that this command will work only with subversion
35221 \begin_inset Formula $\geqq1.5$
35232 \begin_layout Standard
35233 All the commands above have one shortcoming – they deal with the current document only.
35234 Once your document contains pictures,
35236 \begin_inset Flex Code
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35245 files and so on administration becomes more complicated.
35247 now supports updating the whole tree in which resides the document
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35252 One need to organize the files structure so that all external files are in the same directory or subdirectories of the document.
35259 This become especially useful once you cooperate with people which neither know about subversion management nor they have ambition to commit additional material to the repository.
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 \begin_inset Flex Code
35267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35268 Update local directory from repository
35273 command updates the whole directory and in case of merge conflicts local version of the files are left,
35274 so no unintended data loss occurs.
35275 If local changes are detected user is warned before update starts.
35278 \begin_layout Labeling
35279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35281 \begin_inset space ~
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35290 \begin_inset Newline newline
35294 \begin_inset Flex Code
35297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 (Ask if changes are detected.)
35304 \begin_inset Newline newline
35308 \begin_inset Flex Code
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 svn update --accept mine-full $path
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35322 \begin_inset Flex Code
35325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35331 stands for the path to the document.
35334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35340 \begin_layout Standard
35341 This shows the complete history of the SVN document.
35345 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35349 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35354 is shown in a browser.
35357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35361 name "subsec:SVN-File-Locking"
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 The file exchange through various revision control systems brings the problem of merge conflicts in case two different users try to edit the same (parts of) document.
35370 When such a conflict happens it needs manual resolving and one reasonable alternative is to provide some kind of locking mechanism,
35371 which guarantees that only one user is allowed to edit file at the given time.
35374 \begin_layout Standard
35375 SVN has two such mechanisms to provide mutual exclusivity for file access – locks and automatic setting of write permissions (see sec.
35377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35379 reference "subsec:Automatical-Locking-Property"
35385 \begin_inset Flex Code
35388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35399 \begin_inset Flex URL
35402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35404 http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.2/svn.advanced.locking.html
35415 If this property is detected for a given document \SpecialChar LyX
35416 starts to use SVN locks for document editing automatically and the whole check-in/out mechanism switches to the same regimen as for RCS.
35417 This in particular means there are two different modes of file use in \SpecialChar LyX
35421 \begin_layout Itemize
35423 The loaded file is in the read-only mode.
35424 For editing on needs to check-out.
35429 consists of updating from the repository and gaining write lock.
35430 If the lock is not possible to obtain,
35431 we remain in unlocked state.
35434 \begin_layout Itemize
35436 The loaded file is in the
35437 \begin_inset Quotes els
35441 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35445 No other user is allowed to edit the file.
35450 consists of commiting changes and releasing write-lock.
35451 If no changes have been made to the document,
35452 no commit will be produced
35456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35457 Don't be puzzled by the fact that you will be asked for commit message anyway.
35462 and only the write-lock will be released.
35465 \begin_layout Standard
35469 \begin_layout Labeling
35470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35474 svn commit -q -m"<description>" "<file-name>"
35475 \begin_inset Newline newline
35478 svn unlock "<file-name>"
35481 \begin_layout Labeling
35482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35486 svn update "<file-name>"
35487 \begin_inset Newline newline
35490 svn lock "<file-name>"
35493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35498 name "subsec:Automatical-Locking-Property"
35504 Automatic Locking Property
35507 \begin_layout Standard
35508 The above mentioned automatic setting of write permissions of the .lyx file can be set through
35510 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35512 \begin_inset space ~
35515 Control\SpecialChar menuseparator
35516 Use Locking Property
35519 This command is active only when the file is not locked on the svn server (i.e.
35520 you need to check-out before proceeding).
35523 \begin_layout Labeling
35524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_layout Labeling
35533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35537 svn propset svn:needs-lock ON "<file-name>"
35540 \begin_layout Labeling
35541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35545 svn propdel svn:needs-lock "<file-name>"
35548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35551 name "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
35555 Revision Information in Documents
35558 \begin_layout Standard
35559 There are more possibilities how to activate revision information in our document.
35562 \begin_layout Itemize
35568 \begin_layout Itemize
35569 tree revision information (
35570 \begin_inset Flex Code
35573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35580 The result is the output of the
35581 \begin_inset Flex Code
35584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35591 the following table gives you an idea,
35592 how to read the results.
35595 \begin_layout Standard
35597 \begin_inset Tabular
35598 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="6" columns="2">
35599 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35600 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35601 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35640 mixed revision working copy
35647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35656 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35660 modified working copy
35667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35676 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35680 switched working copy
35687 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35700 partial working copy,
35701 from a sparse checkout
35708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35717 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35723 switched working copy
35736 \begin_layout Itemize
35737 file revision information.
35738 The result comes from parsing the output of
35739 \begin_inset Flex Code
35742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 \begin_inset space ~
35748 \begin_inset space ~
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35761 Supported flags are:
35765 \begin_layout Itemize
35766 version number of the last commit (
35767 \begin_inset Flex Code
35770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35779 \begin_layout Itemize
35780 author of the last commit (
35781 \begin_inset Flex Code
35784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35793 \begin_layout Itemize
35794 date of the last commit (
35795 \begin_inset Flex Code
35798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35807 \begin_layout Itemize
35808 time of the last commit (
35809 \begin_inset Flex Code
35812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35823 You can obtain this info via InsetInfo (
35824 \change_inserted 5863208 1564400022
35825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35826 Field\SpecialChar menuseparator
35827 Version Control Revision
35828 \change_deleted 5863208 1564399852
35831 \begin_inset Flex Code
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35835 info-insert buffer vcs-date
35843 The information will be available only when you have the file stored under svn managment (i.e.
35845 \begin_inset Flex Code
35848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35854 directory is available with your document).
35858 \begin_layout Itemize
35861 possibility is to use svn keywords
35865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35866 http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.4/svn.advanced.props.special.keywords.html
35872 In short – you set file keywords property (e.g.
35875 svn propset svn:keywords 'Rev' file.lyx
35877 ) and then paste keyword \SpecialChar TeX
35882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35883 This is an easy way how to ensure that \SpecialChar LyX
35884 won't break the line in the middle of keyword tag.
35889 tag in your document (e.g.
35891 \begin_inset Flex Code
35894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35901 This way svn client will automatically substitute revision number (e.g.
35903 \begin_inset Flex Code
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35913 ) after each update and commit.
35914 There are more problems with this approach.
35916 the '$' character is used in \SpecialChar TeX
35917 world for math equations,
35918 so any occurence of math formula
35919 \begin_inset Formula $Rev$
35923 \begin_inset Formula $Rev:59$
35926 in your \SpecialChar LyX
35928 Similarly for other keywords like Id,
35932 Secondly svn output is dependent on your locales,
35933 so its very easy that svn would produce some problematic strings once Date is used.
35934 Thirdly you get the whole 'Rev:
35935 59' string in your document instead of the plain number.
35936 Until subversion implements user's custom keywords it will be hard to use this approach reliably or let \SpecialChar LyX
35937 to support it directly.
35940 \begin_layout Subsection
35941 SVN and Windows Environment
35944 \begin_layout Quote
35945 My inclination is to say that if the user cannot figure out the command line operations on their own fairly quickly,
35946 they would be well advised to use TortoiseSVN.
35953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35958 In addition to installing \SpecialChar LyX
35960 and having access to a Subversion repository,
35961 the user will need to install the Subversion client program.
35962 A Windows installer for the client program is available from
35963 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35966 target "http://www.collab.net/nonav/downloads/subversion/"
35972 The user may also want to install
35973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35976 target "http://tortoisesvn.tigris.org/"
35982 which integrates Subversion operations into the context (rightclick) menu of Windows Explorer.
35983 Operations done outside \SpecialChar LyX
35984 will typically be more convenient using the Explorer context menu.
35985 Note that TortoiseSVN is not a replacement for the client program,
35986 which is what \SpecialChar LyX
35990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35991 Bringing a document under Subversion control
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35995 Before a \SpecialChar LyX
35996 document can be brought under version control in Subversion,
35997 its parent directory needs to be under version control.
35998 If the document is being added to a project already in the repository,
35999 this is accomplished by checking the project out to the directory where the new document will be placed.
36000 If the project itself is not yet under version control (for instance,
36001 if this document starts a new project),
36002 the directory must be imported into the repository.
36003 This is done outside \SpecialChar LyX
36005 Both import and checkout are easily accomplished from the Explorer context menu using TortoiseSVN,
36006 or alternatively can be done using the command line client at a DOS prompt.
36007 The procedure for importing the project using TortoiseSVN is described below,
36008 assuming an existing repository and a new project being started in
36015 For information on using the Subversion client program,
36023 \begin_layout Enumerate
36030 in Windows Explorer,
36034 TortoiseSVN\SpecialChar menuseparator
36039 adjust the URL for the repository,
36043 \begin_layout Enumerate
36044 Right click the level of the repository under which you want to place the new project folder (typically the top level) and click
36048 Supply a name for the project folder and click OK.
36049 Add a message for the log file if desired,
36050 then click OK again.
36051 The new project folder should appear in the repository.
36053 click OK again to exit the repository browser.
36056 \begin_layout Enumerate
36057 Once again right click
36064 this time selecting SVN Checkout\SpecialChar ldots
36065 Select the URL of the project folder you just created in the repository,
36066 and set the checkout directory to
36074 You will be warned about a non-empty folder;
36075 click OK to proceed.
36076 You should now have a
36087 \begin_layout Enumerate
36088 Create or open your document in \SpecialChar LyX
36091 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36096 Control\SpecialChar menuseparator
36100 Add a log message and click OK to commit the document to version control.
36103 \begin_layout Standard
36104 From this point onward,
36105 you should have full functionality in the
36107 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36115 You also have the option of checking the document in and out,
36116 viewing its history,
36118 using the TortoiseSVN context menu in Windows Explorer or the Subversion client program from a command prompt.
36121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36122 SSH tunnel used with SVN under Windows
36125 \begin_layout Standard
36126 Compared with Linux setting up an svn client to communicate over ssh under Windows is a rather troublesome task.
36127 We will at least offer some hints how to setup the client side but prior knowledge about ssh and the Windows command line is needed,
36128 also be prepared for a great deal of frustration\SpecialChar ldots
36132 \begin_layout Enumerate
36133 Get an svn client for windows,
36134 as described in the previous sections.
36135 When it is a fresh install run some svn command (e.g.
36137 \begin_inset Flex Code
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 ) to create config files,
36147 which you will need to change later on.
36150 \begin_layout Enumerate
36151 Choose an ssh client for Windows.
36152 There are several possibilities,
36153 we will use the one from Putty tools
36157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36158 \begin_inset Flex URL
36161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36163 http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html
36174 You will need to set the connection up so that the client doesn't ask for any password from you.
36175 To keep things easy we will use only keys without any additional password protection etc.
36179 \begin_layout Enumerate
36181 \begin_inset Flex Code
36184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36191 Save your private .ppk key file and put the public one on the server side.
36192 If the SVN server runs on Linux,
36193 note that the format of the public key is not compatible with Linux openssh and you will need to direcly copy-paste the key from the
36194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36199 Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file
36202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36205 edit field into the server's
36206 \begin_inset Flex Code
36209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36210 ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
36216 \begin_inset Flex Code
36219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36228 \begin_layout Enumerate
36230 \begin_inset Flex Code
36233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36240 In the SVN config file
36244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 Exact path depends on Windows version,
36246 usually somewhere around
36247 \begin_inset Flex Code
36250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36253 Documents and Settings
36267 \begin_inset Flex Code
36270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36290 \begin_inset Flex Code
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 ssh=c:/path/plink.exe -i c:/path/private_key.ppk
36303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36304 It will usually take a lot of time to get exact command right and it depends on many things.
36305 For example do not have some remote server saved as a default session in Putty etc.
36307 try to connect via plink without SVN first.
36316 \begin_layout Enumerate
36317 Checkout the SVN archive,
36319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36323 \begin_inset Newline newline
36327 \begin_inset Flex Code
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36331 svn co svn+ssh://user@server/repository_path
36339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36340 End-of-Line Conversions
36343 \begin_layout Standard
36344 When the collaborators are mixing Linux and Windows environments,
36346 will use different line endings inside the .lyx files.
36347 This is not a problem as far as \SpecialChar LyX
36348 functionality is concerned,
36349 but the commit diffs will be huge and merge-conflicts prone.
36350 Fortunately SVN itself knows
36354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36355 \begin_inset Flex URL
36358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36360 http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.4/svn.advanced.props.file-portability.html
36370 how to deal with CR/LF problems when switching .lyx files to the
36371 \begin_inset Flex Code
36374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36387 \begin_inset Flex Code
36390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36391 svn propset svn:eol-style native FILE_NAME
36404 \begin_layout Subsection
36405 GIT commands in \SpecialChar LyX
36409 \begin_layout Standard
36410 A minimal subset of GIT commands is now supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36412 You can find the commands in the
36414 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36422 Please note that if you use password protected access to repository via ssh,
36423 you will be asked in terminal window.
36425 was tested against GIT 1.7.
36429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 Windows users please note that you need to ensure that git is on the path.
36431 This can be set from within \SpecialChar LyX
36434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36436 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 One big difference of GIT and the other supported version control systems is the distributed nature of GIT:
36449 With traditional version control systems there is one central server which hosts the repository.
36450 Users commit their changes to the server,
36451 and get updates made by other users from it.
36453 users commit to a local repository.
36454 The local repository can be synchronized with one or more remote repositories using the
36455 \begin_inset Flex Code
36458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36465 \begin_inset Flex Code
36468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36476 does not interact in any way with remote GIT repositories.
36477 It works exclusively with the local repository in a very similar way as with a central CVS or SVN repository.
36478 If you use remote GIT repositories you need to do the
36479 \begin_inset Flex Code
36482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36489 \begin_inset Flex Code
36492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36498 operations with your favourite GIT client.
36501 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36507 \begin_layout Standard
36508 If your document is not under revision control,
36509 this is the only item shown in the menu.
36510 And if it is under revision control,
36515 item is not visible.
36518 \begin_layout Standard
36519 This command registers in GIT your document ONLY in case you have already the documents directory under GIT control (in particular
36524 This means you have to checkout the archive by yourself.
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36528 Then you are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
36529 Don't forget that registered file is not yet committed.
36532 \begin_layout Standard
36533 GIT command that is run:
36537 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36541 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36552 to understand the switches.
36555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36561 \begin_layout Standard
36562 When you are finished editing a file,
36563 you commit your changes.
36565 you are asked for a description of the changes.
36566 After that changes are committed.
36569 \begin_layout Standard
36573 git commit -q -m"<description>" <file-name>
36576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36579 Revert To Repository Version
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36583 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
36584 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
36587 \begin_layout Standard
36592 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36596 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36609 This will rename the current document including the version history.
36610 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
36611 You are asked for a file name and a description of the rename operation.
36612 After that the document is renamed,
36613 both locally and in the repository.
36614 If the parent directories of the new and old file names differ,
36615 all relative paths of included files are adjusted (like in
36617 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
36623 the document is reloaded using the new name.
36626 \begin_layout Labeling
36627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset Newline newline
36642 \begin_inset Flex Code
36645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36649 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36653 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36657 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36661 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36670 \begin_inset Newline newline
36674 \begin_inset Flex Code
36677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 This shows the complete history of the GIT document.
36697 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36701 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36706 is shown in a browser.
36709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36715 supports GIT hash number of the last commit to the file,
36717 \change_inserted 1119979965 1564297456
36718 its abbreviated form,
36722 date and time of last commit.
36723 All those are extracted from
36725 git log -n 1 --pretty=format:%H%n
36726 \change_inserted 1119979965 1564297427
36732 Tree version information is obtained via
36734 git describe --abbrev --dirty --long
36738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36740 reference "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
36748 \begin_layout Subsection
36752 \begin_layout Standard
36753 With the recent addition of the
36754 \begin_inset Flex Code
36757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36763 function \SpecialChar LyX
36764 power users are allowed to create their own commands for revision control.
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36768 As an example you can see how two TortoiseSVN commands could be integrated directly:
36771 \begin_layout Description
36774 \begin_inset Flex Code
36777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36778 vc-command DR "." "TortoiseProc /command:commit /path:$$p"
36786 \begin_layout Description
36789 \begin_inset Flex Code
36792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36793 vc-command DR "." "TortoiseProc /command:revert /path:$$p"
36801 \begin_layout Subsection
36802 Version control and Document comparison
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 One of the typical uses of version control is to inspect the changes between revisions,
36807 usually by creating
36808 \begin_inset Flex Code
36811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36818 While this is useful for plain text files,
36819 it is much less useful in the case of \SpecialChar LyX
36821 which have more a complicated structure.
36822 Hence we provide binding to the Document comparison feature.
36823 There are two ways of calling this feature – either by direct call of
36824 \begin_inset Flex Code
36827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36834 function (for details see \SpecialChar LyX
36835 functions manual) or by the toolbar icon
36849 One can either compare two chosen revisions of the document or he can simply compare the current version of edited text with older revisions (where '
36850 \begin_inset Flex Noun
36853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36859 ' revisions back means comparison of the edited file with last commited revision).
36863 \begin_layout Standard
36864 This feature is supported for SVN and RCS though due to the more complicated versioning scheme of RCS there is a constraint – when addressing the revisions in dialog,
36865 numbers always point to the last number in RCS revision number,
36868 We don't currently support GIT addressing of revisions,
36869 one can just compare edited document with its revision X steps backs,
36870 where X is addressed as
36871 \begin_inset Flex Code
36874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36883 \begin_layout Section
36885 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161575
36886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36888 name "sec:Literate-Programming"
36894 Literate Programming
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36902 (kayvan@sylvan.com)
36907 original documentation written by
36909 Edmar Wienskoski Jr.
36912 (edmar-w-jr@technologist.com)
36915 \begin_layout Subsection
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 The main purpose of this documentation is to show you how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36921 for literate programming,
36922 where it is assumed that you are familiar with this programming technique,
36924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36940 If that is not the case,
36941 please follow the web links provided in the following sections.
36942 There is a lot of good documentation out there covering old development history to the latest tools tips.
36945 \begin_layout Standard
36946 It is also assumed that you are familiar with \SpecialChar LyX
36947 itself to a point that you are comfortable changing your \SpecialChar LyX
36949 and X resources file.
36950 If that is not the case please refer to other \SpecialChar LyX
36951 documentation to cover your specific needs.
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36955 Literate Programming
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36959 From the Literate Programming FAQ:
36963 \begin_layout Quotation
36964 Literate programming is the combination of documentation and source together in a fashion suited for reading by human beings.
36966 literate programs should be enjoyable reading,
36969 I couldn't resist!) In general,
36970 literate programs combine source and documentation in a single file.
36971 Literate programming tools then parse the file to produce either readable documentation or compilable source.
36972 The WEB style of literate programming was created by D.
36973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36977 Knuth during the development of his \SpecialChar TeX
36978 typesetting software.
36982 \begin_layout Standard
36983 Another excerpt says:
36986 \begin_layout Quotation
36989 How is literate programming different from verbose commenting?
36992 \begin_layout Quotation
36993 There are three distinguishing characteristics.
36994 In order of importance,
37000 \begin_layout Itemize
37001 flexible order of elaboration
37004 \begin_layout Itemize
37005 automatic support for browsing
37008 \begin_layout Itemize
37009 typeset documentation,
37010 especially diagrams and mathematics
37014 \begin_layout Standard
37015 Now that I sparked your curiosity,
37016 take a look in the references.
37019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37023 \begin_layout Standard
37024 The complete Literate Programming FAQ can be found at:
37027 \begin_layout Quote
37028 Literate Programming FAQ
37029 \begin_inset Flex URL
37032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37034 http://www.literateprogramming.com/lpfaq.pdf
37042 \begin_layout Standard
37043 The FAQ lists 23 (twenty three!) different literate programming tools.
37044 Where some are specialized or
37045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37052 for particular programming languages,
37053 while other have general scope.
37058 for my own use for several reasons:
37061 \begin_layout Itemize
37062 It can generate the documentation either in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37066 \begin_layout Itemize
37067 It has a open architecture,
37069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37073 \begin_inset space \space{}
37076 it is easy to plug in new filters
37080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37085 are programs that read a given data stream and output a manipulated data stream.
37087 a WEB file (consisting of literate code) can be turned into a file consisting only of C program code or \SpecialChar LaTeX
37093 and to perform special processing that you may need.
37097 \begin_layout Itemize
37098 There is a good selection of filters available already (the HTML is one of them).
37101 \begin_layout Itemize
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37106 The Noweb web page can be found at:
37110 \begin_layout Quote
37112 \begin_inset Flex URL
37115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37117 https://www.cs.tufts.edu/~nr/noweb/
37125 \begin_layout Standard
37126 Starting from there you can reach many other interesting links and even some literate program examples.
37129 \begin_layout Subsection
37131 and Literate Programming with Noweb
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37135 The \SpecialChar LyX
37136 support for Literate Programming is provided by using the generic \SpecialChar LyX
37137 converters mechanism.
37138 This support is provided in a
37139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37152 \begin_inset space \space{}
37155 you will be able to use this new \SpecialChar LyX
37156 feature with some other literate programming tool of your choice by just changing your \SpecialChar LyX
37160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37161 Generating documents and code (weaving and tangling)
37164 \begin_layout Paragraph
37165 Using the noweb module
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37169 If you have installed Noweb and \SpecialChar LyX
37171 whenever you open a new document,
37172 after you have chosen its document class,
37175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37187 If Noweb is correctly installed,
37188 when you click on the
37189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37205 module in the available list and you can add it to your document.
37208 \begin_layout Paragraph
37212 \begin_layout Standard
37214 enables you to write code with a custom inset named
37215 \begin_inset Flex Noun
37218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37225 Noweb delimits chunks like this:
37228 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37232 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37236 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37240 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37244 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37248 \begin_layout Standard
37249 The problem is that whatever is written in between the << and the
37253 must be taken literally,
37255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37259 \begin_inset space \space{}
37263 should be prevented from making any special interpretation of what has been written.
37264 This is also handled by
37265 \begin_inset Flex Noun
37268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37275 that works like a normal text inset but has a free spacing capability.
37278 \begin_layout Standard
37280 you can also use the
37281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37288 construct of Noweb in your chunks to add items to Noweb's identifier cross-reference:
37291 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37295 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37296 def some_function(args):
37299 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37300 "This is the doc string for this function."
37303 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37309 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37310 @ %def some_function
37313 \begin_layout Standard
37314 For an example of this usage and the resulting cross-reference output,
37315 look at the Literate python program in
37317 LIBDIR/examples/listerrors.lyx
37319 which should make this all clear.
37322 \begin_layout Paragraph
37323 Generating the documentation
37326 \begin_layout Standard
37327 At this point you already have a new document file with a proper document class,
37328 and with some code and text on it.
37330 The answer is simple,
37333 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37338 Just like you would do for a plain document.
37339 No special procedure is required.
37342 \begin_layout Standard
37343 To help orientate you,
37344 I will now explain what happens inside \SpecialChar LyX
37348 \begin_layout Enumerate
37351 Update\SpecialChar menuseparator
37354 menu option is chosen,
37355 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37361 \begin_layout Standard
37362 If the document is of any literate class the generated file will be named with an extension name defined by the
37363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37370 format (defined in the Preferences panel),
37371 otherwise the file will have the usual
37379 \begin_layout Enumerate
37380 Note that the only difference so far is in the name of the file,
37381 no special processing is required by \SpecialChar LyX
37383 Given that you formatted the code using the
37384 \begin_inset Flex Noun
37387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37395 takes care of the business.
37398 \begin_layout Enumerate
37399 If the document is of any literate class \SpecialChar LyX
37400 will then use the internal \SpecialChar LyX
37401 to Noweb converter,
37402 followed by the Noweb to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37408 The converters are defined in the
37410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37431 manual for general information about converters.
37436 to generate the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37442 Otherwise it will just skip this step.
37446 \begin_layout Enumerate
37449 is invoked and the regular post processing continues as in a plain document.
37452 \begin_layout Standard
37453 Independence from a particular
37454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37461 is easily achieved by changing the commands that are run by the various converters.
37464 \begin_layout Paragraph
37465 Generating the code
37468 \begin_layout Standard
37469 When the build menu option is chosen or the corresponding button in the toolbar is pressed,
37470 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37471 file is generated just like step 1 above.
37479 This converter needs to be defined by the user and is not installed by default,
37480 though the Program format is.
37481 This converter (like any other converter) will have two parts:
37484 \begin_layout Enumerate
37485 The converter program itself.
37486 This program performs the conversion from the one format to the other (in this case,
37487 from the Noweb format to the Program pseudo-format).
37490 \begin_layout Enumerate
37491 The error log parser.
37492 This is a program whose sole purpose is to rewrite error messages in a format that \SpecialChar LyX
37494 This makes it possible for \SpecialChar LyX
37495 to place error boxes in the right places in the file buffer.
37498 \begin_layout Standard
37501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37512 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37520 \begin_layout Standard
37521 This basically means that \SpecialChar LyX
37523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37530 (a program or script) with the name of the Noweb file (normally a file in the \SpecialChar LyX
37531 temp directory) and the directory path of the original \SpecialChar LyX
37536 \begin_layout Standard
37537 This is an implementation of
37538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37545 that you can place in a directory on your path:
37548 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37554 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37560 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37563 notangle -Rbuild-script $1 | env NOWEB_SOURCE=$1 NOWEB_OUTPUT_DIR=$2 sh
37566 \begin_layout Standard
37567 The next part of the converter setting is the
37568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37575 which is to be set to
37578 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37581 parselog=$$s/scripts/listerrors
37584 \begin_layout Standard
37585 This will run any errors that are generated by the
37586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37593 process through the
37594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37604 \begin_layout Standard
37605 The build will normally take place in \SpecialChar LyX
37606 's temporary directory,
37607 so the files produced by the conversion will be in that directory.
37609 will copy out what it regards as the `main' file,
37614 conversion may produce several files,
37615 and so most of these would then be deleted when \SpecialChar LyX
37617 This is why we pass in the NOWEB_OUTPUT_DIR environment variable so that the build-script chunk can place the generated files in that location.
37620 \begin_layout Paragraph
37621 Build instructions in the document
37624 \begin_layout Standard
37625 The last piece of the integration between \SpecialChar LyX
37627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37636 the instructions for building your program should be embedded in a chunk of its own.
37638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37645 above uses the notangle command to look for this chunk (called
37646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37653 ) and runs its contents through
37654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37664 \begin_layout Standard
37666 such a chunk would look something like this:
37669 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37675 \begin_inset Newline newline
37678 if [ -z "${NOWEB_SOURCE}" ]
37679 \begin_inset Newline newline
37685 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37686 NOWEB_SOURCE=myfile.nw
37687 \begin_inset Newline newline
37691 \begin_inset Newline newline
37695 code to extract files ...
37696 use NOWEB_OUTPUT_DIR here ...]
37697 \begin_inset Newline newline
37701 code to compile files ...]
37702 \begin_inset Newline newline
37708 \begin_layout Standard
37710 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161716
37713 LIBDIR/examples/listerrors.lyx
37717 LIBDIR/examples/Literate.lyx
37718 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161716
37722 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37723 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
37724 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
37730 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161729
37734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37741 program for some illustrations of how all of these pieces go together or in
37742 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161756
37745 LIBDIR/examples/noweb2lyx.lyx
37746 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161756
37750 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37751 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
37752 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
37753 Noweb2\SpecialChar LyX
37764 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161767
37767 files show off the language-indepence of the \SpecialChar LyX
37768 literate programming support since they are written in Python
37769 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161782
37773 and Perl respectively.
37776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37777 Configuring \SpecialChar LyX
37781 \begin_layout Standard
37782 All the Literate Programming support is configured by the
37784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37796 The important parts are:
37799 \begin_layout Description
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37813 \begin_inset space ~
37816 format Set up via the File Formats tab,
37817 this is where the Noweb-specific pieces are set up.
37827 the file extension is set to
37832 This tells \SpecialChar LyX
37833 to create a file with a
37837 extension in the first step of the conversion process.
37840 \begin_layout Description
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_inset space ~
37853 format This is an empty format whose sole purpose is to be the endpoint of a conversion (which then allows us to set up a converter for it).
37856 \begin_layout Description
37866 This converter performs the
37867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37874 of the literate document.
37877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37882 noweave -delay -index $$i > $$o
37885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37891 \begin_layout Description
37901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37910 the Converter is set to
37911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37924 \begin_inset Newline newline
37928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37933 parselog=$$s/scripts/listerrors
37936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 There is also a new function implemented in the \SpecialChar LyX
37950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37953 server-goto-file-row" function,
37954 to be used with ddd/gdb or other debugger.
37958 \begin_layout Standard
37959 When debugging code with ddd/gdb,
37960 it is possible to invoke a text editor at the current execution position with a single key stroke.
37961 The default ddd configuration for that is shift-ctrl-V.
37962 It happens that you can define the editor command line invocation in ddd by accessing the
37964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37965 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37968 dialog and changing the "Edit Sources" entry.
37971 \begin_layout Standard
37972 I take advantage of the newly created \SpecialChar LyX
37973 server function and this ddd feature,
37975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37985 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37986 echo "LYXCMD:monitor:server-goto-file-row:@FILE@ @LINE@" >~/.lyxpipe.in
37989 \begin_layout Standard
37991 whenever you are using ddd and find a point in the program that you want to edit,
37992 you just press shift-ctrl-V (in the ddd window),
37993 and ddd will forward this information to \SpecialChar LyX
37994 through the \SpecialChar LyX
37995 server and then the \SpecialChar LyX
37996 window will show the same file with the cursor at the same position ddd was pointing to.
37997 No more guessing or long scrolling to locate a point in the program back from debugging !
38000 \begin_layout Standard
38001 Note however that you must enable the \SpecialChar LyX
38002 server to get this feature working (it is disabled by default).
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38010 reference "sec:Starting-the-Server"
38015 explains how to do that.
38018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38022 \begin_layout Standard
38023 There are six new buttons that can be added to your \SpecialChar LyX
38025 Four of these buttons are short cuts to layout styles:
38048 one for the custom inset
38053 The last one is a short cut to the
38054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38067 has a range of buttons that are available for tool bar customization.
38068 In my toolbar I like to combine the six short cuts above with two more:
38073 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38078 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38086 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38090 Here is how it looks like:
38093 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38097 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38101 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38102 Icon "layout Standard"
38105 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38106 Icon "layout Section"
38109 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38110 Icon "layout \SpecialChar LaTeX
38114 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38115 Icon "layout \SpecialChar LyX
38119 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38120 Icon "flex.insert Chunk"
38123 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38127 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38131 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38132 Icon "buffer-typeset"
38135 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38136 Icon "build-program"
38139 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38143 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38147 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38151 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38155 \begin_layout LyX-Code
38159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38160 Colors customization
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38164 There are a number of colors in \SpecialChar LyX
38165 that can be customized in
38170 One of the things that bothers people is the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38172 The default color is red,
38173 since the chunks uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
38175 and there is a lot of chunks in literate documents,
38176 you may get tired of seeing everything in red.
38177 You can change it by going to the tabs
38187 \begin_layout Standard
38188 The next thing is the visible presence of the newline character in the screen.
38189 You can choose the color of this particular character and make it blend in the background.
38190 I recommend you choosing a color that is close to the background but not equal,
38191 that way you still can see it is there,
38192 but it is not bothering you anymore.
38195 \begin_layout Subsection
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38210 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161863
38213 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38214 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
38220 \change_deleted 564990737 1671643409
38226 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161856
38229 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38230 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
38231 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
38237 \change_deleted 564990737 1671643461
38238 the Sweave manual (menu
38240 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38244 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161856
38247 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38248 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
38250 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161921
38255 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161917
38258 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38259 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
38260 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
38264 \change_deleted 564990737 1672742969
38268 \begin_layout Standard
38270 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355343
38274 \begin_layout Standard
38276 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355343
38277 You can do everything with \SpecialChar LyX
38278 that you can do with \SpecialChar LaTeX
38282 cannot support every \SpecialChar LaTeX
38284 But you can always use \SpecialChar TeX
38286 This chapter shows you some more special things you might want to use.
38287 For other special things you can do with figures,
38294 \begin_inset space ~